*the research paper must include information on the topic from the textbook ” 8th edition of Ronald J. Comer, fundamentals of abnormal psychology”. appropiate statistical information where relevant (prevalence, treatment, and outcomes) should be include in the latest research findings. *Complete description of major theories or main characters or concepts including relevant associations made from the textbook. *extremely well written and documented, concisely organized, completed in spa style, no spelling, grammar errors. *5 or more references, 3-4 citations per page. most references are less than 10 yrs old and peer reviewed. used at least one cross cultural reference. *paper should have a comprehensive theme, or main idea summary. should show significant evidence of originality, organization, and planning. the majority of the content needs to be fresh, original, creative, based upon logical conclusions, and an accurate understanding of reference material.

*the research paper must include information on the topic from the textbook ” 8th edition of Ronald J. Comer, fundamentals of abnormal psychology”.
appropiate statistical information where relevant (prevalence, treatment, and outcomes) should be include in the latest research findings.
*Complete description of major theories or main characters or concepts including relevant associations made from the textbook.
*extremely well written and documented, concisely organized, completed in spa style, no spelling, grammar errors.
*5 or more references, 3-4 citations per page. most references are less than 10 yrs old and peer reviewed. used at least one cross cultural reference.
*paper should have a comprehensive theme, or main idea summary. should show significant evidence of originality, organization, and planning. the majority of the content needs to be fresh, original, creative, based upon logical conclusions, and an accurate understanding of reference material.

Read More

Your task with this semester project is to research a social issue and determine whether the courts have weighed in on this issue. If they have, you should then explore whether the case generated significant social, legal, political and/or economic change. You should then explain how and why (based on academic resources, your own opinion, or, ideally, both). Your analysis should include a discussion of court cases. When you discuss the case(s), please provide a brief summary of the case and an explanation of why and how the case has (or has not) created social change. You should also spend some time predicting the potential for the decision of the court to galvanize meaningful, long-lasting social change. You should also rely on academic sources for an analysis of the cases and the social issue. When considering these academic sources, please avoid simple summary of the findings of others. Instead, critically analyze those opinions and ideas in the context of your own thesis. 5 sources

Your task with this semester project is to research a social
issue and determine whether the courts have weighed in on this issue. If they
have, you should then explore whether the case generated significant social,
legal, political and/or economic change. You should then explain how and why
(based on academic resources, your own opinion, or, ideally, both).

Your analysis should include a discussion of court cases.
When you discuss the case(s), please provide a brief summary of the case and an
explanation of why and how the case has (or has not) created social change. You
should also spend some time predicting the potential for the decision of the
court to galvanize meaningful, long-lasting social change.

You should also rely on academic sources for an analysis of
the cases and the social issue. When considering these academic sources, please
avoid simple summary of the findings of others. Instead, critically analyze
those opinions and ideas in the context of your own thesis.

5 sources

Read More

new england, dishes and the a little bit of history, how the dishes effect in the culture of new england with two pictures please don’t plegerise i will read the entire paper before pay the money, please don’t. also you have to find 5 different sources and put each one on the back of the paper, like work cited the sources all of the from book no use the web side and the others from books magazines, news papers

new england, dishes and the a little bit of history, how the dishes effect in the culture of new england with two pictures

please don’t plegerise i will read the entire paper before pay the money, please don’t. also you have to find 5 different sources and put each one on the back of the paper, like work cited the sources all of the from book no use the web side  and the others from books magazines, news papers

Read More

Your task with this semester project is to research a social issue and determine whether the courts have weighed in on this issue. If they have, you should then explore whether the case generated significant social, legal, political and/or economic change. You should then explain how and why (based on academic resources, your own opinion, or, ideally, both). Your analysis should include a discussion of court cases. When you discuss the case(s), please provide a brief summary of the case and an explanation of why and how the case has (or has not) created social change. You should also spend some time predicting the potential for the decision of the court to galvanize meaningful, long-lasting social change. You should also rely on academic sources for an analysis of the cases and the social issue. When considering these academic sources, please avoid simple summary of the findings of others. Instead, critically analyze those opinions and ideas in the context of your own thesis. 5 sources

Your task with this semester project is to research a social
issue and determine whether the courts have weighed in on this issue. If they
have, you should then explore whether the case generated significant social,
legal, political and/or economic change. You should then explain how and why
(based on academic resources, your own opinion, or, ideally, both).

Your analysis should include a discussion of court cases.
When you discuss the case(s), please provide a brief summary of the case and an
explanation of why and how the case has (or has not) created social change. You
should also spend some time predicting the potential for the decision of the
court to galvanize meaningful, long-lasting social change.

You should also rely on academic sources for an analysis of
the cases and the social issue. When considering these academic sources, please
avoid simple summary of the findings of others. Instead, critically analyze
those opinions and ideas in the context of your own thesis.

5 sources

Read More

Critically examine how Government attitude and policy towards sport has changed and evolved over the last 25-30 years. Guidance Review, contrast and compare the approaches of two different Governments during this period in relation to the Sport Policy area – i.e. two from the Conservatives under Thatcher or Major, Labour under Blair or Brown and the Coalition Government. Specific policy areas within sport could be used as examples to illustrate your arguments, for example the different approaches to school sport and P.E. or to the link between sport, physical activity and health or elite performance or ‘sport for all’. Explore similarities and differences and draw on academic sources to support your arguments To achieve an average grade you should be making use of an absolute minimum of 20 academically referenced sources, with particular emphasis on reports and journals. See the Grading Criteria sheet below for more guidance on areas you should focus on in your work. Presentation and submission: Please follow the guidelines in the section entitled ‘School of Health and Bioscience Guide to Assessment’ in your School Handbook (A Student’s Guide to Success in the School of Health and Bioscience) unless specifically directed otherwise by your module leader. Module Specific Guidelines on Presentation/Format All work submitted should be; On white A4 paper Double-line spaced In a minimum of 12-point font With a 2.5 centimetre border left around the page Correctly referenced (Harvard Style – see guidance on UEL Plus) With all pages numbered Inclusive of a word count (see below) With your Student number placed on every page in a header or footer Submitted in a single plastic wallet, unstapled

The essay brief has been uploaded for you to view. It is based around government policies within the UK. If you feel you could cover this area, apply for the role.

Not sure if this essay falls under political science but it’s the only topic area that seems to slightly fit.

Thanks :)

a.    Review, contrast and compare the approaches of two different Governments during this period in relation to the Sport Policy area – i.e. two from the Conservatives under Thatcher or Major, Labour under Blair or Brown and the Coalition Government.

 

 

 

SE3104 – POLICY ANALYSIS

 

 

 

Component no.:    One

 

Title:                              Changing Government Sport Policy

 

Format:                Essay

 

Word count:          2400 words

 

Weighting:            60%

 

Submission date: Tuesday 25th March 2014 by 4.30pm (drop box available

until 9am on 26th March 2014)

 

Turnitin:               This assignment must be submitted to Turnitin

 

This assignment is intended to assess the following learning outcomes:

 

  1. Evaluate the ideologies that drive policy formulation.
  2. Analyse the processes for formulating policy for the provision of sport and leisure
  3. Review the influence of the policies of planning, best value, health and safety and mega-events and their impact on sport and leisure.
  4. Explain and evaluate the different international perspectives and their policy objectives for government involvement in sport and leisure.
  5. Analyse the main constraints and objectives within which the different sectors operate.
  6. Demonstrate a critical understanding of policy analysis demonstrated through a written report and presentation.

 

 

 

 

Details of the task

 

Task

Critically examine how Government attitude and policy towards sport has changed and evolved over the last 25-30 years.

 

Guidance   

  1. Review, contrast and compare the approaches of two different Governments during this period in relation to the Sport Policy area – i.e. two from the Conservatives under Thatcher or Major, Labour under Blair or Brown and the Coalition Government.

 

  1. Specific policy areas within sport could be used as examples to illustrate your arguments, for example the different approaches to school sport and P.E. or to the link between sport, physical activity and health or elite performance or ‘sport for all’.

 

  1. Explore similarities and differences and draw on academic sources to support your arguments

 

  1. To achieve an average grade you should be making use of an absolute minimum of 20 academically referenced sources, with particular emphasis on reports and journals.

 

  1. See the Grading Criteria sheet below for more guidance on areas you should focus on in your work.

 

Presentation and submission:

Please follow the guidelines in the section entitled ‘School of Health and Bioscience Guide to Assessment’ in your School Handbook (A Student’s Guide to Success in the School of Health and Bioscience) unless specifically directed otherwise by your module leader.

 

Module Specific Guidelines on Presentation/Format

 

All work submitted should be;

 

  1. On white A4 paper
  2. Double-line spaced
  3. In a minimum of 12-point font
  4. With a 2.5 centimetre border left around the page
  5. Correctly referenced (Harvard Style – see guidance on UEL Plus)
  6. With all pages numbered
  7. Inclusive of a word count (see below)
  8. With your Student number placed on every page in a header or footer
  9. Submitted in a single plastic wallet, unstapled

 

 

Word counts:

If the assignment has a word count, the following rules apply:

 

All words within the text are to be included in the word count. Any work which does not keep within 10% of the set word count will receive a penalty, which will be a deduction of 10% of the marks originally awarded, except in cases where this would take you below the threshold mark for the component.  The word count does not include the list of references at the end of the work.

 

Feedback:

The student charter for assessment states:

You can expect us to – “offer feedback on assessments, normally within 4 weeks of the hand-in for coursework and 5 weeks following exams”.

 

For this assessment you can expect to receive feedback in the following ways:

 

  • Generic feedback will be provided in class within 2 weeks of hand-in
  • Individual work with feedback will be available from the Help Desk within 4 weeks

 

Reassessment details:

 

The reassessment details for this component will be released on your UEL Plus site after the semester B field board.

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Assessment Criteria

Student Number__________________

 

  F

0 – 30

F

30-39

3

40-49

2.2

50-59

2.1

60-69

1st

70-100

Relevance No relevant points or issues covered Mostly irrelevant Considerable parts irrelevant Considerable parts relevant Mostly relevant Covers all relevant points/issues è     Reasons/justifies
Evidence of

Understanding

Little or no Limited Variable Reasonable Sound Extensive    è                                    Original/creative
Depth Insufficient depth Superficial Mainly superficial, limited deeper exploration Some points explored deeply Most points explored deeply Deep exploration of all points    è        Critical analysis/

evaluation

 

Development of argument/ analysis and evaluation

 

No analysis or evaluation

 

Limited analysis/ evaluation Variable analysis/ evaluation Reasonable analysis/ evaluation Sound analysis/ evaluation Extensive                è             Critical/analytical/original
Evidence of wider reading No evidence Limited Some Numerous examples Wide ranging Extensive          è                 Extends scope of work
Use of evidence to support statements/

arguments

None used Limited use of references to support argument Some use of references to support argument Variable use of references to support argument References mostly well used to support argument Comprehensive              è                Critical analysis/

evaluation

Structure  No clear structure –  cannot be followed Limited – difficult to follow throughout Some – difficult to follow in parts Reasonable – can mostly be followed Sound – can be followed Organised – easy to follow è                 Interesting/

stimulating

Referencing No referencing Referencing incorrect Significant errors/omissions Some errors and/or omissions References generally cited correctly with few errors/

omissions

References correctly cited  è    Professional standard
Illustrations and tables Absent/ irrelevant Confusing/

incorrect

 

Do not support work

 

Partially support work Clarify work Enhance work            è              Extend scope of work
Presentation Does not conform to guidelines Limited conformity to guidelines Some conformity to guidelines Variable conformity to guidelines Mostly conforms to guidelines Fully conforms          è               Extend scope of work

to guidelines

Written communication (including grammar, spelling, sentence and paragraph construction) Many errors, text cannot be followed Frequent, major errors – text difficult to follow Frequent errors – impairs readability Occasional errors – text mainly clear Few minor errors – text clear No errors     è     Enhanced readability/comprehension

 

Read More

weeek 1 discn Financial Statements (graded) I suspect that most of us can view and appreciate most sports such as baseball, football, and basketball. What if you were to view a Cricket World Cup game? If you didn’t know the rules you probably would not have much fun. The same happens in business if you don’t understand its language – Accounting. What rules impact a business’ Accounting Information System? What types of compliance is required? Course Project 1 Part A (graded) In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. Let’s start with Exercise 1-17A. Read about CoffeeShop Doughnuts and select one of the four requirements to answer. weeek 2 Accounting System (graded) Last week, we discussed “The Language of Business” and why the accounting information system is important in business. This week, we are going to look at the mechanics of how it all works. It might be a bit easier if we started with an example which would be the Genie Car Wash, Inc. in Chapter 2 of your textbook. Pick a transaction from Genie and let us know how it impacts the accounting equation. Make sure to identify the two accounts impacted. Why is it important to record your selected transaction? Course Project 1: Part A (graded) In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. As you complete the requirements of Week 2, you should review the Course Project tab in Course Home, as you could start work on Project 1. The template for Course Project 1 Parts A & B is located in Doc Sharing. Let’s start with Exercise 2-16A. Select one of the nine financial transactions of the medical practice of Bob Morin, P.C. Develop a journal entry with date and explanation. Post it in this discussion and then conduct peer reviews of your classmates. The next requirement is to select one of the five questions (a-e) and post an answer. Do show your computations. week 3 Ethical Business Decisions (graded) Unfortunately, a quick scan of the business news will normally result in reports of unethical business behavior. To prove this point, let’s start with a review of the news for stories about fraud and other unethical behavior in business. You can use the University Library to start your search. Once you have located an article share it with the class by developing a summary of the important information. Make sure that you give credit to your source. Course Project 1 Part A (graded) Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Then download the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. Let’s start with a review of the three requirements of Part A of the Course Project. Explain why it is important to analyze each financial transaction of a business and to report it in the Accounting Information System. Suggestion: Revisit and review the Lecture tab in Weeks 1 and 2. week 4 Inventory Management (graded) A review of the balance sheet of a retailer, such as Wal-Mart, will disclose that in current assets the majority investment is in inventory. With manufacturers, such as Ford, the inventory is spread between three different categories. Let’s start our discussion with some basic inventory questions. How is inventory valued? Which inventory valuation method is most popular and why? What impact on the financial reports can the selection of an inventory valuation method have? Course Project 1 Part A (graded) Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Continue to use the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1 – Part B. Let’s start with Exercise 3-22A and practice developing journal entries to make adjustments. Select one of the six transactions and develop the adjusting journal entry. If you are using an example found in the textbook do mention the page number. week 5 Non-Current Assets and Related Liabilities (graded) In the spotlight about FedEx Corporation, you get a feel for the amount of investment in assets and the resulting liabilities that are required to operate a competitive corporation. Even small businesses require plant, property, and equipment to compete and normally rely on some form of debt to finance themselves. Let’s start up a company that sells auto parts, like Napa or Auto Zone. What assets would we require? How might we finance them? This section lists options that can be used to view responses. Course Project 1: Part B (graded) Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Continue to use the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1: Part B. Let’s start with Exercise 3-31A. For the Anderson Production Company, select one adjusting and one closing entry requirement. Develop the journal entry for review by your peers. Make sure to reference any page numbers of examples you are using. Hint: Revisit the Week 2 Lecture. week 6 Stockholders’ Equity (graded) When forming a company, the options are sole proprietor, partnership, and corporation. Most choose corporation. Why is the corporate form seen to be best? What rights do the stockholders have? Course Project 2 (graded) Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the process of evaluating the financial performance and health of a company with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 2. Let’s start with gaining an understanding of the Statement of Cash Flows. From Exercise 12-17A, select one of the journal entries and explain how the accounts in the journal entry impact the statement of cash flows. week 7 Financial Statement Analysis (graded) If you were to get a physical from your doctor and he or she only took your blood pressure prior to stating that you are in good health, would you be concerned? If you have noticed in your readings, starting in Chapter 3, there has been explanation of the methods by which you could determine the financial health of a company. Name one and explain how it is computed. Which financial statement(s) does the input come from? Most importantly, what does it tell you about the financial performance or health? Course Project 2 (graded) Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the process of evaluating the financial performance and health of a company with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 2. Let’s start with Exercise 13-19A by preparing a common-size income statement for the McMahon Music Co. Do this in Excel. Do not post your spreadsheet in the discussion, but rather, place a screenshot of it. How did you format the cells? Any suggestions on where to obtain assistance with building the spreadsheet? Course Project 1 – Overview and Guideli Course Project 1 consists of two parts, A and B, respectively. There are 10 requirements for you to complete in this exercise, Part A has 1-3 and Part B has 4-10. Part A is due at the end of Week 3. Part B is due at the end of Week 5. See Syllabus/”Due Dates for Assignments & Exams” for due date information. The Course Project 1 template has all of the information you will need to complete Parts A & B of the project. The template also includes: Detailed Project Instructions (with requirements) A reference list of October transactions A Chart of Accounts reference sheet A Grading Rubric to help explain what is expected. Each worksheet has the Check Figures embedded as a comment. Download the Excel template named ACCT212_CourseProject1 located on the Doc Sharing tab in the course shell. To complete Part A (due at the end of Week 3): Complete Requirements 1-3 on the Journal Entries, General Ledger, and Trial Balance worksheets. Type your work directly into the worksheets. Save your workbook as “CourseProject1A_ ACCT212_YourLastName”. Submit your workbook to the Dropbox under “Course Project 1-Part A” by the end of Week 3. Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page. For instructions on how to use the Dropbox, read thes or watch this Tutorial To complete Part B (due at the end of Week 5): Using feedback from your instructor and the worksheets from Part A, complete requirements 4-10. Type your work directly into the worksheets. Save your workbook as “CourseProject1B_ACCT212_YourLastName”. Submit the workbook to the Dropbox under “Course Project 1-Part B” by the end of Week 5. Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page. Course Project 2 – Overview and Guidelines The Course Project 2 template has all of the information you will need to complete the project including:Course Project 2 satisfies the course description. At the end of Course Project 2, you will be able to prepare common-size statements, analyze profitability; and make comparisons with the industry allowing you to make informed business decisions. Course Project 2 is due at the end of Week 7. Detailed requirements A worksheet to enter your solutions A Grading Rubric to help explain what is expected. Download the Excel template named ACCT212_CourseProject2 located on the Doc Sharing tab in the course shell. To complete Course Project 2 (due at the end of Week 7): Using the requirements worksheet for reference, complete requirements 1-3 on the Your Solution worksheet. Type your work directly into the worksheet. Save your workbook as “CourseProject2_ACCT212_YourLastName”. Submit your workbook to the Dropbox under “Course Project 2” by the end of Week 7 midtermm Page: 1 2 Question 1. Question : (TCO 1) The Accounting Equation is used to develop the organization’s financial reports. (1) Describe what liabilities value would be if Assets are $50,000 and Owners’ Equity is $25,000 by showing the Accounting Equation (10 points) and (2) provide an example of two liability accounts. (10 points) Comments: Question 2. Question : (TCO 1) The financial statements present a company to the public in financial terms. (1) Which financial statement requires input from the Income Statement and Statement of Retained Earnings (10 points), and (2) explain what information this financial statement provides. (10 points) . Comments: Question 3. Question : (TCO 1) The accounting profession follows a set of guidelines for measurement and disclosure of financial information called the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). (1) Explain what the Going-concern Assumption is (10 points) and (2) provide an example of its application. (10 points) Comments: Question 4. Question : (TCO 2) Transaction analysis results in the development of a journal entry. In the start-up of a business, the owner contributes $750,000 of cash. (1) Name the accounts impacted and how to use the format account name/debit or credit/dollar amount (10 points), and (2) explain how the Accounting Equation is impacted. (10 points) Question 5. Question : (TCO 3) Adjusting Entries are required at the end of the period to ensure that accrual accounting principles are applied. The building that houses the business is depreciated at an annual rate of $14,000. Develop the adjusting entry for year end. (1) Name the accounts impacted and how to use the format account name/debit or credit/dollar amount (10 points), and (2) explain how the Accounting Equation is impacted. (10 points) Comments: (TCO 5) E-commerce creates its own risks, and therefore special internal controls. (1) Identify and explain one pitfall and one security measure for an online business (10 points) and (2) provide examples of how your selected security measure will strengthen internal control. (15 points) Comments: Question 2. Question : (TCO 5) The bank account as a control device helps to protect cash. One of the requirements is to conduct periodic bank statement reconciliations. Using the following data, complete the bank statement reconciliation for J & J Flooring, Inc. (Use the format shown on page 251 of your textbook.) (25 points) •????????The bank statement indicated a service charge of $56. •????????J & J made a deposit on May 31, but this deposit did not appear on the bank statement, $1,451. •????????A credit memo in the bank statement indicated a bank collection of a note for $1,300 with interest received of $16. This item was dated May 18. •????????Also included in the bank statement was a debit memo for a NSF check for $314 from Barney Smythe. •????????Checks #1406 for $1,342, #1610 for $1,609, and #1825 for $857 were written by J & J and sent to the respective companies, but these checks do not appear on the bank statement. •????????The balance on the bank statement as of May 31 was $13,019. •????????The Cash account on Janus’ books showed an amount of $9,716.

weeek 1 discn

Financial Statements (graded)

I suspect that most of us can view and appreciate most sports such as baseball, football, and basketball. What if you were to view a Cricket World Cup game? If you didn’t know the rules you probably would not have much fun. The same happens in business if you don’t understand its language – Accounting. What rules impact a business’ Accounting Information System? What types of compliance is required?

 
 
 

Course Project 1 Part A (graded)

In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. Let’s start with Exercise 1-17A. Read about CoffeeShop Doughnuts and select one of the four requirements to answer.

 
 
 
weeek 2
 
 
 
 

Accounting System (graded)

Last week, we discussed “The Language of Business” and why the accounting information system is important in business. This week, we are going to look at the mechanics of how it all works. It might be a bit easier if we started with an example which would be the Genie Car Wash, Inc. in Chapter 2 of your textbook. Pick a transaction from Genie and let us know how it impacts the accounting equation. Make sure to identify the two accounts impacted. Why is it important to record your selected transaction?

 
 
 

Course Project 1: Part A (graded)

In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1. As you complete the requirements of Week 2, you should review the Course Project tab in Course Home, as you could start work on Project 1. The template for Course Project 1 Parts A & B is located in Doc Sharing.Let’s start with Exercise 2-16A. Select one of the nine financial transactions of the medical practice of Bob Morin, P.C. Develop a journal entry with date and explanation. Post it in this discussion and then conduct peer reviews of your classmates. The next requirement is to select one of the five questions (a-e) and post an answer. Do show your computations.

 

 

 

week 3

 

 

Ethical Business Decisions (graded)

Unfortunately, a quick scan of the business news will normally result in reports of unethical business behavior. To prove this point, let’s start with a review of the news for stories about fraud and other unethical behavior in business. You can use the University Library to start your search. Once you have located an article share it with the class by developing a summary of the important information. Make sure that you give credit to your source.

 

 

 

 

Course Project 1 Part A (graded)

Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Then download the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1.

Let’s start with a review of the three requirements of Part A of the Course Project. Explain why it is important to analyze each financial transaction of a business and to report it in the Accounting Information System. Suggestion: Revisit and review the Lecture tab in Weeks 1 and 2.

 

 

week 4

 

 

Inventory Management (graded)

A review of the balance sheet of a retailer, such as Wal-Mart, will disclose that in current assets the majority investment is in inventory. With manufacturers, such as Ford, the inventory is spread between three different categories. Let’s start our discussion with some basic inventory questions. How is inventory valued? Which inventory valuation method is most popular and why? What impact on the financial reports can the selection of an inventory valuation method have?

 

 

Course Project 1 Part A (graded)

Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Continue to use the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1 – Part B.

Let’s start with Exercise 3-22A and practice developing journal entries to make adjustments. Select one of the six transactions and develop the adjusting journal entry. If you are using an example found in the textbook do mention the page number.


 
 
 
 
week 5
 
 
 

Non-Current Assets and Related Liabilities (graded)

In the spotlight about FedEx Corporation, you get a feel for the amount of investment in assets and the resulting liabilities that are required to operate a competitive corporation. Even small businesses require plant, property, and equipment to compete and normally rely on some form of debt to finance themselves. Let’s start up a company that sells auto parts, like Napa or Auto Zone. What assets would we require? How might we finance them?

This section lists options that can be used to view responses.

 
 
 

Course Project 1: Part B (graded)

Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. Continue to use the Course Project template from Doc Sharing. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the operation of the Accounting Information System (AIS) with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 1: Part B.Let’s start with Exercise 3-31A. For the Anderson Production Company, select one adjusting and one closing entry requirement. Develop the journal entry for review by your peers. Make sure to reference any page numbers of examples you are using. Hint: Revisit the Week 2 Lecture.


 
week 6
 
 

Stockholders’ Equity (graded)

When forming a company, the options are sole proprietor, partnership, and corporation. Most choose corporation. Why is the corporate form seen to be best? What rights do the stockholders have?

Course Project 2 (graded)

Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the process of evaluating the financial performance and health of a company with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 2.

Let’s start with gaining an understanding of the Statement of Cash Flows. From Exercise 12-17A, select one of the journal entries and explain how the accounts in the journal entry impact the statement of cash flows.

 

 

week 7

 

 

Financial Statement Analysis (graded)

If you were to get a physical from your doctor and he or she only took your blood pressure prior to stating that you are in good health, would you be concerned? If you have noticed in your readings, starting in Chapter 3, there has been explanation of the methods by which you could determine the financial health of a company. Name one and explain how it is computed. Which financial statement(s) does the input come from? Most importantly, what does it tell you about the financial performance or health?

 

Course Project 2 (graded)

Go to Course Home and review the Course Project tab. In this graded discussion, we will be examining the process of evaluating the financial performance and health of a company with the use of problems and exercises from your textbook. The goal is to cover all of the requirements to ensure an opportunity for your successful completion of Course Project 2.

Let’s start with Exercise 13-19A by preparing a common-size income statement for the McMahon Music Co. Do this in Excel. Do not post your spreadsheet in the discussion, but rather, place a screenshot of it. How did you format the cells? Any suggestions on where to obtain assistance with building the spreadsheet?

 
 
 
 

Course Project 1 – Overview and Guideli

Course Project 1 consists of two parts, A and B, respectively. There are 10 requirements for you to complete in this exercise, Part A has 1-3 and Part B has 4-10. Part A is due at the end of Week 3. Part B is due at the end of Week 5. See Syllabus/”Due Dates for Assignments & Exams” for due date information.

The Course Project 1 template has all of the information you will need to complete Parts A & B of the project. The template also includes:

  • Detailed Project Instructions (with requirements)
  • A reference list of October transactions
  • A Chart of Accounts reference sheet
  • A Grading Rubric to help explain what is expected.
  • Each worksheet has the Check Figures embedded as a comment.
  1. Download the Excel template named ACCT212_CourseProject1 located on the Doc Sharing tab in the course shell.
  2. To complete Part A (due at the end of Week 3):
    • Complete Requirements 1-3 on the Journal Entries, General Ledger, and Trial Balance worksheets.
    • Type your work directly into the worksheets.
    • Save your workbook as “CourseProject1A_ ACCT212_YourLastName”.
    • Submit your workbook to the Dropbox under “Course Project 1-Part A” by the end of Week 3. Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page. For instructions on how to use the Dropbox, read thes or watch this Tutorial
  3. To complete Part B (due at the end of Week 5):
    • Using feedback from your instructor and the worksheets from Part A, complete requirements 4-10.
    • Type your work directly into the worksheets.
    • Save your workbook as “CourseProject1B_ACCT212_YourLastName”.
    • Submit the workbook to the Dropbox under “Course Project 1-Part B” by the end of Week 5. Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page.

Course Project 2 – Overview and Guidelines

The Course Project 2 template has all of the information you will need to complete the project including:Course Project 2 satisfies the course description. At the end of Course Project 2, you will be able to prepare common-size statements, analyze profitability; and make comparisons with the industry allowing you to make informed business decisions. Course Project 2 is due at the end of Week 7.

  • Detailed requirements
  • A worksheet to enter your solutions
  • A Grading Rubric to help explain what is expected.
  1. Download the Excel template named ACCT212_CourseProject2 located on the Doc Sharing tab in the course shell.
  2. To complete Course Project 2 (due at the end of Week 7):
    • Using the requirements worksheet for reference, complete requirements 1-3 on the Your Solution worksheet.
    • Type your work directly into the worksheet.
    • Save your workbook as “CourseProject2_ACCT212_YourLastName”.
    • Submit your workbook to the Dropbox under “Course Project 2” by the end of Week 7


midtermm

Page: 1 2

Question 1. Question : (TCO 1) The Accounting Equation is used to develop the organization’s financial reports. (1) Describe what liabilities value would be if Assets are $50,000 and Owners’ Equity is $25,000 by showing the Accounting Equation (10 points) and (2) provide an example of two liability accounts. (10 points)

 

 

 

Comments:

Question 2. Question : (TCO 1) The financial statements present a company to the public in financial terms. (1) Which financial statement requires input from the Income Statement and Statement of Retained Earnings (10 points), and (2) explain what information this financial statement provides. (10 points)

 

.

 

 

Comments:

Question 3. Question : (TCO 1) The accounting profession follows a set of guidelines for measurement and disclosure of financial information called the Generally Accepted Accounting Principles (GAAP). (1) Explain what the Going-concern Assumption is (10 points) and (2) provide an example of its application. (10 points)

 

 

Comments:

Question 4. Question : (TCO 2) Transaction analysis results in the development of a journal entry. In the start-up of a business, the owner contributes $750,000 of cash. (1) Name the accounts impacted and how to use the format account name/debit or credit/dollar amount (10 points), and (2) explain how the Accounting Equation is impacted. (10 points)

Question 5. Question : (TCO 3) Adjusting Entries are required at the end of the period to ensure that accrual accounting principles are applied. The building that houses the business is depreciated at an annual rate of $14,000. Develop the adjusting entry for year end. (1) Name the accounts impacted and how to use the format account name/debit or credit/dollar amount (10 points), and (2) explain how the Accounting Equation is impacted. (10 points)

 

Comments:

(TCO 5) E-commerce creates its own risks, and therefore special internal controls. (1) Identify and explain one pitfall and one security measure for an online business (10 points) and (2) provide examples of how your selected security measure will strengthen internal control. (15 points)

 

 

 

Comments:

Question 2. Question : (TCO 5) The bank account as a control device helps to protect cash. One of the requirements is to conduct periodic bank statement reconciliations. Using the following data, complete the bank statement reconciliation for J & J Flooring, Inc. (Use the format shown on page 251 of your textbook.) (25 points)

 

•????????The bank statement indicated a service charge of $56.

•????????J & J made a deposit on May 31, but this deposit did not appear on the bank statement, $1,451.

•????????A credit memo in the bank statement indicated a bank collection of a note for $1,300 with interest received of $16. This item was dated May 18.

•????????Also included in the bank statement was a debit memo for a NSF check for $314 from Barney Smythe.

•????????Checks #1406 for $1,342, #1610 for $1,609, and #1825 for $857 were written by J & J and sent to the respective companies, but these checks do not appear on the bank statement.

•????????The balance on the bank statement as of May 31 was $13,019.

•????????The Cash account on Janus’ books showed an amount of $9,716.

 

Read More

he condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2009 and 2008 are presented below. Westward Corporation Westward Corporation Balance Sheet Income Statement December 31, 2009 For the Year Ended December 31, 2009 Assets Revenues $2,000,000 Current assets Expenses Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,080,000 investments $ 30,000 Selling and administrative Accounts receivable 70,000 Expenses 495,000 Inventories 120,000 Interest expense 30,000 Total current assets 220,000 Total expenses 1,605,000 Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 395,000 equipment (net) 780,000 Income tax expense 140,000 Total assets $1,000,000 Net income $ 255,000 Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Current liabilities $ 80,000 Long-term liabilities 300,000 Common stockholders’ equity 620,000 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $1,000,000 Westward Corporation Westward Corporation Balance Sheet Income Statement December 31, 2008 For the Year Ended December 31, 2008 Assets Revenues $2,500,000 Current assets Expenses Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,750,000 investments $ 40,000 Selling and administrative Accounts receivable 90,000 Expenses 500,000 Inventories 150,000 Interest expense 30,000 Total current assets 280,000 Total expenses 2,280,000 Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 220,000 equipment (net) 800,000 Income tax expense 77,000 Total assets $1,080,000 Net income $ 143,000 Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity Current liabilities $ 140,000 Long-term liabilities 320,000 Common stockholders’ equity 620,000 Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $1,080,000 Select data from fiscal year 2007: Inventory: $100,000 Total assets: $900,000 Stockholders’ Equity: $540,000 Instructions 1. Compute the following listed ratios for 2009 and 2008 showing supporting calculations. (5.2 points) a. Current ratio b. Debt to total Assets c. Times interest earned d. Inventory turnover e. Profit margin ratio f. Return on common stockholders’ equity g. Return on assets 2. Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward’s financial statements, show your results. (3.0 points) 3. Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used in questions 1 and 2 above. (5.3 points) 4. If the company wanted to perform industry comparison analysis, what references would you recommend it use? (1.5 points)

he condensed financial statements of Westward Corporation for 2009 and 2008 are presented below.

Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2009 For the Year Ended December 31, 2009

Assets Revenues $2,000,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,080,000
investments $ 30,000
Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 70,000
Expenses 495,000
Inventories 120,000
Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 220,000
Total expenses 1,605,000
Property, plant, and Income
before income taxes 395,000
equipment (net) 780,000
Income tax expense 140,000
Total assets $1,000,000
Net income $ 255,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 80,000
Long-term liabilities 300,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and stockholders’ equity $1,000,000

Westward Corporation Westward Corporation
Balance Sheet Income Statement
December 31, 2008 For the Year Ended December 31, 2008

Assets Revenues $2,500,000
Current assets Expenses
Cash and temporary Cost of goods sold 1,750,000
investments $ 40,000
Selling and administrative
Accounts receivable 90,000
Expenses 500,000
Inventories 150,000
Interest expense 30,000
Total current assets 280,000
Total expenses 2,280,000
Property, plant, and Income before income taxes 220,000
equipment (net) 800,000
Income tax expense 77,000
Total assets $1,080,000
Net income $ 143,000

Liabilities and Stockholders’ Equity
Current liabilities $ 140,000
Long-term liabilities 320,000
Common stockholders’ equity 620,000
Total liabilities and
stockholders’ equity $1,080,000

Select data from fiscal year 2007:

Inventory: $100,000
Total assets: $900,000
Stockholders’ Equity: $540,000

Instructions

1. Compute the following listed ratios for 2009 and 2008 showing supporting calculations. (5.2 points)
a. Current ratio
b. Debt to total Assets
c. Times interest earned
d. Inventory turnover
e. Profit margin ratio
f. Return on common stockholders’ equity
g. Return on assets

2. Perform horizontal and vertical analysis on Westward’s financial statements, show your results. (3.0 points)

3. Assess the financial performance of Westward, given the analysis tools used in questions 1 and 2 above. (5.3 points)

4. If the company wanted to perform industry comparison analysis, what references would you recommend it use? (1.5 points)

Read More

You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities. As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more timeintensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide. In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations. Final Paper Spreadsheet I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing. II. Current company cash flow a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method. b. Once you’ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions: i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds? ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow? iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not? iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why? III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product. a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing? b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product? c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product? d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product? IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years: Year 1, $15,000 Year 2, $13,000 Year 3, $10,000 Year 4, $10,000 Year 5, $6,000 ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment. a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)? b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory’s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow? c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

You’ve just been hired onto ABC Company as the corporate controller. ABC Company is a manufacturing firm that specializes in making cedar roofing and siding shingles. The company currently has annual sales of around $1.2 million, a 25% increase from the previous year. The company
has an aggressive growth target of reaching $3 million annual sales within the next 3 years. The CEO has been trying to find additional products that can leverage the current ABC employee skillset as well as the manufacturing facilities.
As the controller of ABC Company, the CEO has come to you with a new opportunity that he’s been working on. The CEO would like to use the some of the shingle scrap materials to build cedar dollhouses. While this new product line would add additional raw materials and be more timeintensive to manufacture than the cedar shingles, this new product line will be able to leverage ABC’s existing manufacturing facilities as well as the current staff. Although this product line will require added expenses, it will provide additional revenue and gross profit to help reach the growth targets. The CEO is relying on you to help decide how this project can be afforded Provide details about the estimated product costs, what is needed to break even on the project, and what level of return this product is expected to provide.
In order to help out the CEO, you need to prepare a six- to eight-page report that will contain the following information (including exhibits, but excluding your references and title page). Refer to the accompanying Excel spreadsheet (available through your online course) for some specific cost and profit information to complete the calculations.

Final Paper Spreadsheet
I. An overall risk profile of the company based on current economic and industry issues that it may be facing.
II. Current company cash flow
a. You need to complete a cash flow statement for the company using the direct method.
b. Once you’ve completed the cash flow statement, answer the following questions:
i. What does this statement of cash flow tell you about the sources and uses of the company funds?
ii. Is there anything ABC Company can do to improve the cash flow?
iii. Can this project be financed with current cash flow from the company? Why or why not?
iv. If the company needs additional financing beyond what ABC Company can provide internally (either now or sometime throughout the life of the project), how would you suggest the company obtain the additional financing, equity or corporate debt, and why?
III. Product cost: ABC Company believes that it has an additional 5,000 machine hours available in the current facility before it would need to expand. ABC Company uses machine hours to allocate the fixed factory overhead, and units sold to allocate the fixed sales expenses. Bases on current research, ABC Company expects that it will take twice as long to produce the expansion product as it currently takes to produce its existing product.
a. What is the product cost for the expansion product under absorption and variable costing?
b. By adding this new expansion product, it helps to absorb the fixed factory and sales expenses. How much cheaper does this expansion make the existing product?
c. Assuming ABC Company wants a 40% gross margin for the new product, what selling price should it set for the expansion product?
d. Assuming the same sales mix of these two products, what are the contribution margins and break-even points by product?
IV. Potential investments to accelerate profit: ABC company has the option to purchase additional equipment that will cost about $42,000, and this new equipment will produce the following savings in factory overhead costs over the next five years:
Year 1, $15,000
Year 2, $13,000
Year 3, $10,000
Year 4, $10,000
Year 5, $6,000
ABC Company uses the net-present-value method to analyze investments and desires a minimum rate of return of 12% on the equipment.
a. What is the net present value of the proposed investment (ignore income taxes and depreciation)?
b. Assuming a 5-year straight-line depreciation, how will this impact the factory’s fixed costs for each of the 5 years (and the implied product costs)? What about cash flow?
c. Considering the cash flow impact of the equipment as well as the time-value of money, would you recommend that ABC Company purchases the equipment? Why or why not?

Read More

ACCT 5060 – Final Exam 1. The four key behavioral considerations in management accounting and control system design include all of the following EXCEPT: a. integrating the organization’s pay scale b. using a mix of short- and long-term qualitative and quantitative performance measures c. empowering employees to be involved in decision making and MACS design d. developing an appropriate incentive system to reward performance 2. Pressures on managers to act unethically include all of the following EXCEPT: a. pressures to act in the long-run best interest of the shareholders b. solicitations for confidential information c. requests to falsify reports d. requests to bias information in favor of certain stakeholders 3. To the extent that an ethical hierarchy exists, _____ have the highest authority. a. societal norms b. legal rules c. organizational norms d. personal norms 4. When a manager’s and employee’s goals are aligned with organizational goals, it is referred to as: a. a diagnostic control system b. the intensity factor c. goal congruence d. monitoring 5. The roles of performance measurement systems in organizations include all of the following EXCEPT: a. motivate employees to help the organization achieve its strategic objectives b. help managers with resource allocation c. create value from intangible assets as well as their physical and financial assets d. communicate the company’s strategic objectives 6. The Balanced Scorecard is said to be “balanced” because it measures: a. short-term and long-term objectives b. financial and nonfinancial objectives c. internal and external objectives d. All of the above are correct. 7. The ______________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard asks, “At which processes must we excel to satisfy our customers and shareholders?” a. learning and growth b. customer c. process d. shareholder 8. The __________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard focuses on creating value for customers. a. Value b. Financial c. Stakeholder d. Customer 9. Measures of employees’ skills and capabilities are included in the ________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard. a. financial b. internal c. customer d. learning and growth perspective 10. A chain of cause-and-effect relationships that appropriately link the four balanced scorecard perspectives is: a. a high return on investment causes customer loyalty that results in skilled production workers that improve process quality b. skilled production workers help to produce process quality that results in customer loyalty that helps to increase return on investment c. customer loyalty results in a high return on investment that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers that improve process quality d. improved process quality results in a high return on investment that causes customer loyalty that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers 11. Participative budgeting is an approach to budgeting that a. is top-down in nature. b. allows top management to set the budget. c. discourages budget slack. d. is more likely to motivate people to work towards the organization’s goals t than a top-down approach. 12. Which of the following is not included in the operating budget? a. Budgeted balance sheet b. Sales budget c. Selling and administrative budget d. Raw materials purchases budget 13. A primary financial budget is the a.. Production budget b. Cash budget c. Inventory budget d. Selling and administrative budget 14. Jackel Company produces hand tools. A sales budget for the next four months is as follows: March 10,000 units, April 13,000, May 16,000 and June 21,000. Jackel Company’s ending finished goods inventory policy is 10% of the following month’s sales. What is budgeted finished goods inventory for May? a. 1,000 b. 1,300 c. 1,600 d. 2,100 15. In which order are the following developed? A = Production plan B = Materials purchasing plan C = Demand forecast D = Sales plan a. first to last: A, B, C, D b. first to last: C, D, A, B c. first to last: D, C, B, A d. first to last: C, A, D, B THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 16 -18. For the next six months, Berry Company projects the following information (in units). July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Retail demand 100 100 150 150 200 200 Dealer demand 200 250 300 350 400 450 Shop capacity 500 500 500 500 500 500 Painting capacity 350 350 350 600 600 600 Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first. 16. The production for July is projected to be: a. 100 units b. 300 units c. 350 units d. 500 units 17. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is: a. 300 units b. 350 units c. 500 units d. 200 units 18. Painting capacity appears to be: a. short-term capacity b. intermediate-term capacity c. long-term capacity d. total demand THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 19 -21 The following information for the second quarter of 2006 pertains to Huffman Company: Month Sales Purchases April $45,000 $24,000 May $60,000 $30,000 June $75,000 $42,000 • Cash is collected from customers in the following manner: Month of sale 30% Month following the sale 70% • 40% of purchases are paid for in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance is paid the following month. • Labor costs are 20% of sales. Other operating costs are $22,500 per month (including $6,000 of depreciation). Both of these are paid in the month incurred. • The cash balance on June 1 is $6,000. A minimum cash balance of $4,500 is required at the end of the month. Money can be borrowed in multiples of $1,500. * No loans outstanding on June 1. 19. How much cash will be collected from customers in June? a. $64,500 b. $70,500 c. $75,000 d. None of the above is correct. 20. How much cash will be paid to suppliers in June? a. $34,800 b. $28,000 c. $44,000 d. None of the above is correct. 21. How much cash will be disbursed for labor and operating costs in June? a. $31,500 b. $35,000 c. $44,200 d. $48,200 22. In __________, as one budget period passes, planners delete that budget period from the master budget and add another one. a. zero-based budgeting b. periodic budgeting c. incremental budgeting d. continuous budgeting THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 23 – 25. Community Manufacturing Inc., developed the following standard costs for direct material and direct labor for one of their major products, the 30-gallon heavy-duty plastic container. Standard quantity Standard price Direct materials 0.20 pounds $25 per pound Direct labor 0.10 hours $15 per hour During May, Community produced and sold 10,000 containers using 2,200 pounds of direct materials at an average cost per pound of $24 and 1,050 direct labor hours at an average wage of $14.75 per hour. 23. May’s direct material price variance was: a. $2,800 favorable b. $2,200 favorable c. $5,000 unfavorable d. None of the above is correct. 24. May’s direct material quantity variance was: a. $2,800 unfavorable b. $2,200 favorable c. $5,000 unfavorable d. None of the above is correct. 25. May’s direct labor rate variance was: a. $750.00 unfavorable b. $262.50 favorable c. $487.50 favorable d. indeterminable using the above information 26. Which of the following methods is calculated as annual net income as a percentage of the original investment in assets? a. Accounting rate of return b. Payback period c. Net present value d. Internal rate of return 27. Sorius Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in net cash flows of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the annual net income? Ignore income taxes. a. $25,000 b. $35,000 c. $165,000 d. $175,000 28. Peet’s Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in cash flow of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the payback period? Ignore income taxes. a. 3.25 years b. 4.00 years c. 4.75 years d. 7.00 years 29. Marchand Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment, which would have an initial cost of $500,000, a 7 year life, and $150,000 salvage value. The increase in cash flow each year of the equipment’s life would be as follows: What is the payback period? a. 5.51 years b. 5.97 years c. 6.00 years d. 6.18 years 30. The idea that the value of money changes over time because it can be invested to earn interest is the a. net present value of money. b. accounting value of money. c. time value of money. d. investment value of money. 31. When making screening decisions using the net present value method, a project is acceptable if a. the NPV is greater than the hurdle rate. b. the NPV is greater than the IRR. c. the NPV is positive. d. the NPV is negative. 32. Minne Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 8%, the project has a net present value of $24,580. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 10%, the project has a net present value of ($28,940). The internal rate of return of the project is a. zero. b. between zero and 8%. c. between 8% and 10%. d. greater than 10%. 33. An analysis that reveals whether changing the underlying assumptions would affect the decision is a a. net present value analysis. b. internal rate of return analysis. c. payback period analysis. d. sensitivity analysis 34. Jonas Inc. is considering whether to lease or purchase a piece of equipment. The total cost to lease the equipment will be $120,000 over its estimated life, while the total cost to buy the equipment will be $75,000 over its estimated life. At Jonas’s required rate of return, the net present value of the cost of leasing the equipment is $73,700 and the net present value of the cost of buying the equipment is $68,000. Based on financial factors, Jonas should a. lease the equipment, saving $45,000 over buying. b. buy the equipment, saving $45,000 over leasing. c. lease the equipment, saving $5,700 over buying. d. buy the equipment, saving $5,700 over leasing. 35. In a decentralized organization: a. local-division managers must receive higher approval for most business decisions b. company-wide standard operating procedures are common c. local-division managers have an opportunity to gain decision-making experience d. decisions are made by senior executives 36. All of the following are true of responsibility centers EXCEPT that they: a. operate like a small business b. promote the interests of the larger organization c. coordinate activities with other responsibility centers d. are best used in a centralized organization 37. Segment margin includes: a. all costs traceable to the segment b. the segment’s share of allocated corporate costs c. the segment’s share of allocated unavoidable costs d. All of the above are correct. 38 The primary goal of transfer pricing is to: a. motivate the decision maker to act in the organization’s best interests b. obtain a high transfer price for the supplying unit c. obtain a high transfer price for the receiving unit d. agree on a price for external sales 39. Return on investment (ROI) can be increased by: a. increasing sales b. decreasing operating assets c. decreasing operating income d. decreasing asset turnover 40. Randall Company makes and distributes outdoor play equipment. Last year sales were $2,400,000, operating income was $600,000, and the assets used were $3,000,000.The return on investment (ROI) is: a. 20% b. 80% c. 25% d. 125%

ACCT 5060 – Final Exam

1. The four key behavioral considerations in management accounting and control system design include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. integrating the organization’s pay scale
b. using a mix of short- and long-term qualitative and quantitative performance measures
c. empowering employees to be involved in decision making and MACS design
d. developing an appropriate incentive system to reward performance
2. Pressures on managers to act unethically include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. pressures to act in the long-run best interest of the shareholders
b. solicitations for confidential information
c. requests to falsify reports
d. requests to bias information in favor of certain stakeholders

3. To the extent that an ethical hierarchy exists, _____ have the highest authority.
a. societal norms
b. legal rules
c. organizational norms
d. personal norms

4. When a manager’s and employee’s goals are aligned with organizational goals, it is referred to as:
a. a diagnostic control system
b. the intensity factor
c. goal congruence
d. monitoring
5. The roles of performance measurement systems in organizations include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. motivate employees to help the organization achieve its strategic objectives
b. help managers with resource allocation
c. create value from intangible assets as well as their physical and financial assets
d. communicate the company’s strategic objectives

6. The Balanced Scorecard is said to be “balanced” because it measures:
a. short-term and long-term objectives
b. financial and nonfinancial objectives
c. internal and external objectives
d. All of the above are correct.
7. The ______________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard asks, “At which processes must we excel to satisfy our customers and shareholders?”
a. learning and growth
b. customer
c. process
d. shareholder

8. The __________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard focuses on creating value for customers.
a. Value
b. Financial
c. Stakeholder
d. Customer

9. Measures of employees’ skills and capabilities are included in the ________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard.
a. financial
b. internal
c. customer
d. learning and growth perspective
10. A chain of cause-and-effect relationships that appropriately link the four
balanced scorecard perspectives is:
a. a high return on investment causes customer loyalty that results in skilled production workers that improve process quality
b. skilled production workers help to produce process quality that results in customer loyalty that helps to increase return on investment
c. customer loyalty results in a high return on investment that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers that improve process quality
d. improved process quality results in a high return on investment that causes customer loyalty that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers
11. Participative budgeting is an approach to budgeting that
a. is top-down in nature.
b. allows top management to set the budget.
c. discourages budget slack.
d. is more likely to motivate people to work towards the organization’s goals t
than a top-down approach.

12. Which of the following is not included in the operating budget?
a. Budgeted balance sheet
b. Sales budget
c. Selling and administrative budget
d. Raw materials purchases budget
13. A primary financial budget is the
a.. Production budget
b. Cash budget
c. Inventory budget
d. Selling and administrative budget

14. Jackel Company produces hand tools. A sales budget for the next four months is as follows: March 10,000 units, April 13,000, May 16,000 and June 21,000. Jackel Company’s ending finished goods inventory policy is 10% of the following month’s sales. What is budgeted finished goods inventory for May?
a. 1,000
b. 1,300
c. 1,600
d. 2,100
15. In which order are the following developed?
A = Production plan B = Materials purchasing plan
C = Demand forecast D = Sales plan
a. first to last: A, B, C, D
b. first to last: C, D, A, B
c. first to last: D, C, B, A
d. first to last: C, A, D, B

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 16 -18.
For the next six months, Berry Company projects the following information (in
units).

July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Retail demand 100 100 150 150 200 200
Dealer demand 200 250 300 350 400 450
Shop capacity 500 500 500 500 500 500
Painting capacity 350 350 350 600 600 600

Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first.

16. The production for July is projected to be:
a. 100 units
b. 300 units
c. 350 units
d. 500 units
17. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is:
a. 300 units
b. 350 units
c. 500 units
d. 200 units
18. Painting capacity appears to be:
a. short-term capacity
b. intermediate-term capacity
c. long-term capacity
d. total demand
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 19 -21
The following information for the second quarter of 2006 pertains to Huffman Company:

Month Sales Purchases
April $45,000 $24,000
May $60,000 $30,000
June $75,000 $42,000

• Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:
Month of sale 30%
Month following the sale 70%

• 40% of purchases are paid for in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance is paid the following month.

• Labor costs are 20% of sales. Other operating costs are $22,500 per month (including $6,000 of depreciation). Both of these are paid in the month incurred.

• The cash balance on June 1 is $6,000. A minimum cash balance of $4,500 is required at the end of the month. Money can be borrowed in multiples of $1,500.
* No loans outstanding on June 1.

19. How much cash will be collected from customers in June?
a. $64,500
b. $70,500
c. $75,000
d. None of the above is correct.

20. How much cash will be paid to suppliers in June?
a. $34,800
b. $28,000
c. $44,000
d. None of the above is correct.
21. How much cash will be disbursed for labor and operating costs in June?
a. $31,500
b. $35,000
c. $44,200
d. $48,200

22. In __________, as one budget period passes, planners delete that budget period from the master budget and add another one.
a. zero-based budgeting
b. periodic budgeting
c. incremental budgeting
d. continuous budgeting

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 23 – 25.
Community Manufacturing Inc., developed the following standard costs for direct material and direct labor for one of their major products, the 30-gallon heavy-duty plastic container.

Standard quantity Standard price
Direct materials 0.20 pounds $25 per pound
Direct labor 0.10 hours $15 per hour

During May, Community produced and sold 10,000 containers using 2,200 pounds of direct materials at an average cost per pound of $24 and 1,050 direct labor hours at an average wage of $14.75 per hour.

23. May’s direct material price variance was:
a. $2,800 favorable
b. $2,200 favorable
c. $5,000 unfavorable
d. None of the above is correct.
24. May’s direct material quantity variance was:
a. $2,800 unfavorable
b. $2,200 favorable
c. $5,000 unfavorable
d. None of the above is correct.

25. May’s direct labor rate variance was:
a. $750.00 unfavorable
b. $262.50 favorable
c. $487.50 favorable
d. indeterminable using the above information
26. Which of the following methods is calculated as annual net income as a percentage of the original investment in assets?
a. Accounting rate of return
b. Payback period
c. Net present value
d. Internal rate of return

27. Sorius Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in net cash flows of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the annual net income? Ignore income taxes.
a. $25,000
b. $35,000
c. $165,000
d. $175,000
28. Peet’s Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in cash flow of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the payback period? Ignore income taxes.
a. 3.25 years
b. 4.00 years
c. 4.75 years
d. 7.00 years

29. Marchand Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment, which would have an initial cost of $500,000, a 7 year life, and $150,000 salvage value. The increase in cash flow each year of the equipment’s life would be as follows:

What is the payback period?
a. 5.51 years
b. 5.97 years
c. 6.00 years
d. 6.18 years

30. The idea that the value of money changes over time because it can be invested to earn interest is the
a. net present value of money.
b. accounting value of money.
c. time value of money.
d. investment value of money.

31. When making screening decisions using the net present value method, a project is acceptable if
a. the NPV is greater than the hurdle rate.
b. the NPV is greater than the IRR.
c. the NPV is positive.
d. the NPV is negative.

32. Minne Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 8%, the project has a net present value of $24,580. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 10%, the project has a net present value of ($28,940). The internal rate of return of the project is
a. zero.
b. between zero and 8%.
c. between 8% and 10%.
d. greater than 10%.

33. An analysis that reveals whether changing the underlying assumptions would affect the decision is a
a. net present value analysis.
b. internal rate of return analysis.
c. payback period analysis.
d. sensitivity analysis

34. Jonas Inc. is considering whether to lease or purchase a piece of equipment. The total cost to lease the equipment will be $120,000 over its estimated life, while the total cost to buy the equipment will be $75,000 over its estimated life. At Jonas’s required rate of return, the net present value of the cost of leasing the equipment is $73,700 and the net present value of the cost of buying the equipment is $68,000. Based on financial factors, Jonas should
a. lease the equipment, saving $45,000 over buying.
b. buy the equipment, saving $45,000 over leasing.
c. lease the equipment, saving $5,700 over buying.
d. buy the equipment, saving $5,700 over leasing.
35. In a decentralized organization:
a. local-division managers must receive higher approval for most business decisions
b. company-wide standard operating procedures are common
c. local-division managers have an opportunity to gain decision-making experience
d. decisions are made by senior executives

36. All of the following are true of responsibility centers EXCEPT that they:
a. operate like a small business
b. promote the interests of the larger organization
c. coordinate activities with other responsibility centers
d. are best used in a centralized organization
37. Segment margin includes:
a. all costs traceable to the segment
b. the segment’s share of allocated corporate costs
c. the segment’s share of allocated unavoidable costs
d. All of the above are correct.
38 The primary goal of transfer pricing is to:
a. motivate the decision maker to act in the organization’s best interests
b. obtain a high transfer price for the supplying unit
c. obtain a high transfer price for the receiving unit
d. agree on a price for external sales
39. Return on investment (ROI) can be increased by:
a. increasing sales
b. decreasing operating assets
c. decreasing operating income
d. decreasing asset turnover
40. Randall Company makes and distributes outdoor play equipment. Last year sales were $2,400,000, operating income was $600,000, and the assets used were $3,000,000.The return on investment (ROI) is:
a. 20%
b. 80%
c. 25%
d. 125%

Read More

ACCT 5060 – Final Exam 1. The four key behavioral considerations in management accounting and control system design include all of the following EXCEPT: a. integrating the organization’s pay scale b. using a mix of short- and long-term qualitative and quantitative performance measures c. empowering employees to be involved in decision making and MACS design d. developing an appropriate incentive system to reward performance 2. Pressures on managers to act unethically include all of the following EXCEPT: a. pressures to act in the long-run best interest of the shareholders b. solicitations for confidential information c. requests to falsify reports d. requests to bias information in favor of certain stakeholders 3. To the extent that an ethical hierarchy exists, _____ have the highest authority. a. societal norms b. legal rules c. organizational norms d. personal norms 4. When a manager’s and employee’s goals are aligned with organizational goals, it is referred to as: a. a diagnostic control system b. the intensity factor c. goal congruence d. monitoring 5. The roles of performance measurement systems in organizations include all of the following EXCEPT: a. motivate employees to help the organization achieve its strategic objectives b. help managers with resource allocation c. create value from intangible assets as well as their physical and financial assets d. communicate the company’s strategic objectives 6. The Balanced Scorecard is said to be “balanced” because it measures: a. short-term and long-term objectives b. financial and nonfinancial objectives c. internal and external objectives d. All of the above are correct. 7. The ______________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard asks, “At which processes must we excel to satisfy our customers and shareholders?” a. learning and growth b. customer c. process d. shareholder 8. The __________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard focuses on creating value for customers. a. Value b. Financial c. Stakeholder d. Customer 9. Measures of employees’ skills and capabilities are included in the ________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard. a. financial b. internal c. customer d. learning and growth perspective 10. A chain of cause-and-effect relationships that appropriately link the four balanced scorecard perspectives is: a. a high return on investment causes customer loyalty that results in skilled production workers that improve process quality b. skilled production workers help to produce process quality that results in customer loyalty that helps to increase return on investment c. customer loyalty results in a high return on investment that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers that improve process quality d. improved process quality results in a high return on investment that causes customer loyalty that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers 11. Participative budgeting is an approach to budgeting that a. is top-down in nature. b. allows top management to set the budget. c. discourages budget slack. d. is more likely to motivate people to work towards the organization’s goals t than a top-down approach. 12. Which of the following is not included in the operating budget? a. Budgeted balance sheet b. Sales budget c. Selling and administrative budget d. Raw materials purchases budget 13. A primary financial budget is the a.. Production budget b. Cash budget c. Inventory budget d. Selling and administrative budget 14. Jackel Company produces hand tools. A sales budget for the next four months is as follows: March 10,000 units, April 13,000, May 16,000 and June 21,000. Jackel Company’s ending finished goods inventory policy is 10% of the following month’s sales. What is budgeted finished goods inventory for May? a. 1,000 b. 1,300 c. 1,600 d. 2,100 15. In which order are the following developed? A = Production plan B = Materials purchasing plan C = Demand forecast D = Sales plan a. first to last: A, B, C, D b. first to last: C, D, A, B c. first to last: D, C, B, A d. first to last: C, A, D, B THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 16 -18. For the next six months, Berry Company projects the following information (in units). July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec. Retail demand 100 100 150 150 200 200 Dealer demand 200 250 300 350 400 450 Shop capacity 500 500 500 500 500 500 Painting capacity 350 350 350 600 600 600 Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first. 16. The production for July is projected to be: a. 100 units b. 300 units c. 350 units d. 500 units 17. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is: a. 300 units b. 350 units c. 500 units d. 200 units 18. Painting capacity appears to be: a. short-term capacity b. intermediate-term capacity c. long-term capacity d. total demand THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 19 -21 The following information for the second quarter of 2006 pertains to Huffman Company: Month Sales Purchases April $45,000 $24,000 May $60,000 $30,000 June $75,000 $42,000 • Cash is collected from customers in the following manner: Month of sale 30% Month following the sale 70% • 40% of purchases are paid for in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance is paid the following month. • Labor costs are 20% of sales. Other operating costs are $22,500 per month (including $6,000 of depreciation). Both of these are paid in the month incurred. • The cash balance on June 1 is $6,000. A minimum cash balance of $4,500 is required at the end of the month. Money can be borrowed in multiples of $1,500. * No loans outstanding on June 1. 19. How much cash will be collected from customers in June? a. $64,500 b. $70,500 c. $75,000 d. None of the above is correct. 20. How much cash will be paid to suppliers in June? a. $34,800 b. $28,000 c. $44,000 d. None of the above is correct. 21. How much cash will be disbursed for labor and operating costs in June? a. $31,500 b. $35,000 c. $44,200 d. $48,200 22. In __________, as one budget period passes, planners delete that budget period from the master budget and add another one. a. zero-based budgeting b. periodic budgeting c. incremental budgeting d. continuous budgeting THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 23 – 25. Community Manufacturing Inc., developed the following standard costs for direct material and direct labor for one of their major products, the 30-gallon heavy-duty plastic container. Standard quantity Standard price Direct materials 0.20 pounds $25 per pound Direct labor 0.10 hours $15 per hour During May, Community produced and sold 10,000 containers using 2,200 pounds of direct materials at an average cost per pound of $24 and 1,050 direct labor hours at an average wage of $14.75 per hour. 23. May’s direct material price variance was: a. $2,800 favorable b. $2,200 favorable c. $5,000 unfavorable d. None of the above is correct. 24. May’s direct material quantity variance was: a. $2,800 unfavorable b. $2,200 favorable c. $5,000 unfavorable d. None of the above is correct. 25. May’s direct labor rate variance was: a. $750.00 unfavorable b. $262.50 favorable c. $487.50 favorable d. indeterminable using the above information 26. Which of the following methods is calculated as annual net income as a percentage of the original investment in assets? a. Accounting rate of return b. Payback period c. Net present value d. Internal rate of return 27. Sorius Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in net cash flows of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the annual net income? Ignore income taxes. a. $25,000 b. $35,000 c. $165,000 d. $175,000 28. Peet’s Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in cash flow of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the payback period? Ignore income taxes. a. 3.25 years b. 4.00 years c. 4.75 years d. 7.00 years 29. Marchand Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment, which would have an initial cost of $500,000, a 7 year life, and $150,000 salvage value. The increase in cash flow each year of the equipment’s life would be as follows: What is the payback period? a. 5.51 years b. 5.97 years c. 6.00 years d. 6.18 years 30. The idea that the value of money changes over time because it can be invested to earn interest is the a. net present value of money. b. accounting value of money. c. time value of money. d. investment value of money. 31. When making screening decisions using the net present value method, a project is acceptable if a. the NPV is greater than the hurdle rate. b. the NPV is greater than the IRR. c. the NPV is positive. d. the NPV is negative. 32. Minne Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 8%, the project has a net present value of $24,580. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 10%, the project has a net present value of ($28,940). The internal rate of return of the project is a. zero. b. between zero and 8%. c. between 8% and 10%. d. greater than 10%. 33. An analysis that reveals whether changing the underlying assumptions would affect the decision is a a. net present value analysis. b. internal rate of return analysis. c. payback period analysis. d. sensitivity analysis 34. Jonas Inc. is considering whether to lease or purchase a piece of equipment. The total cost to lease the equipment will be $120,000 over its estimated life, while the total cost to buy the equipment will be $75,000 over its estimated life. At Jonas’s required rate of return, the net present value of the cost of leasing the equipment is $73,700 and the net present value of the cost of buying the equipment is $68,000. Based on financial factors, Jonas should a. lease the equipment, saving $45,000 over buying. b. buy the equipment, saving $45,000 over leasing. c. lease the equipment, saving $5,700 over buying. d. buy the equipment, saving $5,700 over leasing. 35. In a decentralized organization: a. local-division managers must receive higher approval for most business decisions b. company-wide standard operating procedures are common c. local-division managers have an opportunity to gain decision-making experience d. decisions are made by senior executives 36. All of the following are true of responsibility centers EXCEPT that they: a. operate like a small business b. promote the interests of the larger organization c. coordinate activities with other responsibility centers d. are best used in a centralized organization 37. Segment margin includes: a. all costs traceable to the segment b. the segment’s share of allocated corporate costs c. the segment’s share of allocated unavoidable costs d. All of the above are correct. 38 The primary goal of transfer pricing is to: a. motivate the decision maker to act in the organization’s best interests b. obtain a high transfer price for the supplying unit c. obtain a high transfer price for the receiving unit d. agree on a price for external sales 39. Return on investment (ROI) can be increased by: a. increasing sales b. decreasing operating assets c. decreasing operating income d. decreasing asset turnover 40. Randall Company makes and distributes outdoor play equipment. Last year sales were $2,400,000, operating income was $600,000, and the assets used were $3,000,000.The return on investment (ROI) is: a. 20% b. 80% c. 25% d. 125%

ACCT 5060 – Final Exam

1. The four key behavioral considerations in management accounting and control system design include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. integrating the organization’s pay scale
b. using a mix of short- and long-term qualitative and quantitative performance measures
c. empowering employees to be involved in decision making and MACS design
d. developing an appropriate incentive system to reward performance
2. Pressures on managers to act unethically include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. pressures to act in the long-run best interest of the shareholders
b. solicitations for confidential information
c. requests to falsify reports
d. requests to bias information in favor of certain stakeholders

3. To the extent that an ethical hierarchy exists, _____ have the highest authority.
a. societal norms
b. legal rules
c. organizational norms
d. personal norms

4. When a manager’s and employee’s goals are aligned with organizational goals, it is referred to as:
a. a diagnostic control system
b. the intensity factor
c. goal congruence
d. monitoring
5. The roles of performance measurement systems in organizations include all of the following EXCEPT:
a. motivate employees to help the organization achieve its strategic objectives
b. help managers with resource allocation
c. create value from intangible assets as well as their physical and financial assets
d. communicate the company’s strategic objectives

6. The Balanced Scorecard is said to be “balanced” because it measures:
a. short-term and long-term objectives
b. financial and nonfinancial objectives
c. internal and external objectives
d. All of the above are correct.
7. The ______________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard asks, “At which processes must we excel to satisfy our customers and shareholders?”
a. learning and growth
b. customer
c. process
d. shareholder

8. The __________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard focuses on creating value for customers.
a. Value
b. Financial
c. Stakeholder
d. Customer

9. Measures of employees’ skills and capabilities are included in the ________ perspective of the Balanced Scorecard.
a. financial
b. internal
c. customer
d. learning and growth perspective
10. A chain of cause-and-effect relationships that appropriately link the four
balanced scorecard perspectives is:
a. a high return on investment causes customer loyalty that results in skilled production workers that improve process quality
b. skilled production workers help to produce process quality that results in customer loyalty that helps to increase return on investment
c. customer loyalty results in a high return on investment that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers that improve process quality
d. improved process quality results in a high return on investment that causes customer loyalty that results in the ability to attract skilled production workers
11. Participative budgeting is an approach to budgeting that
a. is top-down in nature.
b. allows top management to set the budget.
c. discourages budget slack.
d. is more likely to motivate people to work towards the organization’s goals t
than a top-down approach.

12. Which of the following is not included in the operating budget?
a. Budgeted balance sheet
b. Sales budget
c. Selling and administrative budget
d. Raw materials purchases budget
13. A primary financial budget is the
a.. Production budget
b. Cash budget
c. Inventory budget
d. Selling and administrative budget

14. Jackel Company produces hand tools. A sales budget for the next four months is as follows: March 10,000 units, April 13,000, May 16,000 and June 21,000. Jackel Company’s ending finished goods inventory policy is 10% of the following month’s sales. What is budgeted finished goods inventory for May?
a. 1,000
b. 1,300
c. 1,600
d. 2,100
15. In which order are the following developed?
A = Production plan B = Materials purchasing plan
C = Demand forecast D = Sales plan
a. first to last: A, B, C, D
b. first to last: C, D, A, B
c. first to last: D, C, B, A
d. first to last: C, A, D, B

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 16 -18.
For the next six months, Berry Company projects the following information (in
units).

July Aug. Sept. Oct. Nov. Dec.
Retail demand 100 100 150 150 200 200
Dealer demand 200 250 300 350 400 450
Shop capacity 500 500 500 500 500 500
Painting capacity 350 350 350 600 600 600

Demand drives production for that month and cannot be carried over from one month to another. Retail customers are satisfied first.

16. The production for July is projected to be:
a. 100 units
b. 300 units
c. 350 units
d. 500 units
17. The number of dealer units that will be produced and sold in September is:
a. 300 units
b. 350 units
c. 500 units
d. 200 units
18. Painting capacity appears to be:
a. short-term capacity
b. intermediate-term capacity
c. long-term capacity
d. total demand
THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 19 -21
The following information for the second quarter of 2006 pertains to Huffman Company:

Month Sales Purchases
April $45,000 $24,000
May $60,000 $30,000
June $75,000 $42,000

• Cash is collected from customers in the following manner:
Month of sale 30%
Month following the sale 70%

• 40% of purchases are paid for in cash in the month of purchase, and the balance is paid the following month.

• Labor costs are 20% of sales. Other operating costs are $22,500 per month (including $6,000 of depreciation). Both of these are paid in the month incurred.

• The cash balance on June 1 is $6,000. A minimum cash balance of $4,500 is required at the end of the month. Money can be borrowed in multiples of $1,500.
* No loans outstanding on June 1.

19. How much cash will be collected from customers in June?
a. $64,500
b. $70,500
c. $75,000
d. None of the above is correct.

20. How much cash will be paid to suppliers in June?
a. $34,800
b. $28,000
c. $44,000
d. None of the above is correct.
21. How much cash will be disbursed for labor and operating costs in June?
a. $31,500
b. $35,000
c. $44,200
d. $48,200

22. In __________, as one budget period passes, planners delete that budget period from the master budget and add another one.
a. zero-based budgeting
b. periodic budgeting
c. incremental budgeting
d. continuous budgeting

THE FOLLOWING INFORMATION APPLIES TO QUESTIONS 23 – 25.
Community Manufacturing Inc., developed the following standard costs for direct material and direct labor for one of their major products, the 30-gallon heavy-duty plastic container.

Standard quantity Standard price
Direct materials 0.20 pounds $25 per pound
Direct labor 0.10 hours $15 per hour

During May, Community produced and sold 10,000 containers using 2,200 pounds of direct materials at an average cost per pound of $24 and 1,050 direct labor hours at an average wage of $14.75 per hour.

23. May’s direct material price variance was:
a. $2,800 favorable
b. $2,200 favorable
c. $5,000 unfavorable
d. None of the above is correct.
24. May’s direct material quantity variance was:
a. $2,800 unfavorable
b. $2,200 favorable
c. $5,000 unfavorable
d. None of the above is correct.

25. May’s direct labor rate variance was:
a. $750.00 unfavorable
b. $262.50 favorable
c. $487.50 favorable
d. indeterminable using the above information
26. Which of the following methods is calculated as annual net income as a percentage of the original investment in assets?
a. Accounting rate of return
b. Payback period
c. Net present value
d. Internal rate of return

27. Sorius Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in net cash flows of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the annual net income? Ignore income taxes.
a. $25,000
b. $35,000
c. $165,000
d. $175,000
28. Peet’s Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. The cost savings from the equipment would result in an annual increase in cash flow of $100,000. The equipment will have an initial cost of $400,000 and have a 5 year life. If the salvage value of the equipment is estimated to be $75,000, what is the payback period? Ignore income taxes.
a. 3.25 years
b. 4.00 years
c. 4.75 years
d. 7.00 years

29. Marchand Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment, which would have an initial cost of $500,000, a 7 year life, and $150,000 salvage value. The increase in cash flow each year of the equipment’s life would be as follows:

What is the payback period?
a. 5.51 years
b. 5.97 years
c. 6.00 years
d. 6.18 years

30. The idea that the value of money changes over time because it can be invested to earn interest is the
a. net present value of money.
b. accounting value of money.
c. time value of money.
d. investment value of money.

31. When making screening decisions using the net present value method, a project is acceptable if
a. the NPV is greater than the hurdle rate.
b. the NPV is greater than the IRR.
c. the NPV is positive.
d. the NPV is negative.

32. Minne Corp is considering the purchase of a new piece of equipment. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 8%, the project has a net present value of $24,580. When discounted at a hurdle rate of 10%, the project has a net present value of ($28,940). The internal rate of return of the project is
a. zero.
b. between zero and 8%.
c. between 8% and 10%.
d. greater than 10%.

33. An analysis that reveals whether changing the underlying assumptions would affect the decision is a
a. net present value analysis.
b. internal rate of return analysis.
c. payback period analysis.
d. sensitivity analysis

34. Jonas Inc. is considering whether to lease or purchase a piece of equipment. The total cost to lease the equipment will be $120,000 over its estimated life, while the total cost to buy the equipment will be $75,000 over its estimated life. At Jonas’s required rate of return, the net present value of the cost of leasing the equipment is $73,700 and the net present value of the cost of buying the equipment is $68,000. Based on financial factors, Jonas should
a. lease the equipment, saving $45,000 over buying.
b. buy the equipment, saving $45,000 over leasing.
c. lease the equipment, saving $5,700 over buying.
d. buy the equipment, saving $5,700 over leasing.
35. In a decentralized organization:
a. local-division managers must receive higher approval for most business decisions
b. company-wide standard operating procedures are common
c. local-division managers have an opportunity to gain decision-making experience
d. decisions are made by senior executives

36. All of the following are true of responsibility centers EXCEPT that they:
a. operate like a small business
b. promote the interests of the larger organization
c. coordinate activities with other responsibility centers
d. are best used in a centralized organization
37. Segment margin includes:
a. all costs traceable to the segment
b. the segment’s share of allocated corporate costs
c. the segment’s share of allocated unavoidable costs
d. All of the above are correct.
38 The primary goal of transfer pricing is to:
a. motivate the decision maker to act in the organization’s best interests
b. obtain a high transfer price for the supplying unit
c. obtain a high transfer price for the receiving unit
d. agree on a price for external sales
39. Return on investment (ROI) can be increased by:
a. increasing sales
b. decreasing operating assets
c. decreasing operating income
d. decreasing asset turnover
40. Randall Company makes and distributes outdoor play equipment. Last year sales were $2,400,000, operating income was $600,000, and the assets used were $3,000,000.The return on investment (ROI) is:
a. 20%
b. 80%
c. 25%
d. 125%

Read More

1.Not-for-profit health care organization financial statements include a a. Statement of Cash Flows b. Statement of Activities c. Statement of Revenues, Expenses, and Changes in Fund Balance d. Statement of Budget to Actual 2. Not-for-profit health care organization financial statements include a a. Statement of Net Assets b. Statement of Activities c. Statement of Operations d. Statement of Budget to Actual 3.A not-for-profit health care organization Statement of Operations displays the a. cash balance at the end of the year b. amount of operating income c. net cash used by operating activities d. classified net assets 4. When the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is adjusted, the expense is charged to a. Charity Care b. Provision for Bad Debts c. Doubtful Account Expenses d. Reservation of Fund Equity 5.Public colleges and universities follow accounting standards issued by a. GASB b. FASB 6. c. AICPA d. NACUBO GASB Statement No. 35 requires governmental colleges and universities to a. follow the GASB Statement No. 34 financial reporting model b. produce a Statement of Operations c. use the 1995 AICPA Audits of Colleges and Universities financial reporting model d. only use the modified approach for infrastructure assets 7. A college or university is classified as governmental if a. the governing board is appointed by the c. the governing board is publicly elected college president b. the university pays corporate income taxes d. all of the above 8. The Coleville Community College can levy taxes, issue tax-exempt debt and the governing board is publicly elected. The Coleville Community College is a a. private not-for-profit organization b. governmental organization c. business-type activity d. both b and c are correct 9. Governmental colleges and universities implementing GASB Statements No. 34 and 35 will a. no longer use funds c. use invested in capital assets net of related debt, restricted and unrestricted net asset classes b. use restricted, unrestricted and temporarily d. none of the above restricted net asset classes 10.Colleges and universities may elect to record transactions directly into net asset classes rather than a. the Statement of Activities b. the Statement of Operations c. funds d. liabilities 11. Governmental colleges and universities display student financial aid as a(n) a. discount b. expense c. it is not displayed d. expenditure 12.A public college provides scholarship assistance of $8,000,000 to its students. When the students register for classes the college applies $7,500,000 of the financial aid to their tuition and fee bills of $10,000,000 and students receive $500,000 in cash. The amount that will be recognized as tuition and fee revenue by the college is a. $10,000,000 b. $2,000,000 c. $2,500,000 d. $9,500,000 13. A public university bills $80,000,000 in tuition and fees and provides $23,000,000 in financial aid. The university refunds in cash $800,000 of this financial aid directly to students. What amount will the university report as tuition and fee revenue? a. $80,000,000 b. $79,200,000 c. $57,000,000 d. $57,800,000 14. A public college has tuition and fee billings of $30,000,000 and provides $6,000,000 in financial aid to students. The students apply $5,200,000 of this financial aid to their tuition and fee bill and take the excess in cash. What amount is reported as an expense for financial aid? a. $6,000,000 b. $5,200,000 c. $800,000 d. $6,800,000 15.A public college and university have tuition and fee revenue of $18,000,000 for the summer semester that bridges two fiscal years. Sixty percent of the instruction takes place in the next fiscal year and the university decides to allocate the revenue on that basis. The journal entry to record this transaction in the current fiscal year will include a. $10,800,000 in revenue c. $10,800,000 in deferred revenue b. $18,000,000 in revenue d. $7,200,000 in deferred revenue 16.A patron gets a call from the Metropolitan Opera Society and pledges $1,000 to be used for general operations. The Metropolitan Opera Society will record a. Contribution Revenue – Unrestricted b. Contribution Revenue – Temporarily Restricted c. Contribution Revenue – Permanently Restricted d. nothing because it is only an oral pledge 17.The Humane Society conducts a fund-raising drive by telephone and has total pledges of $55,000 and notes on other possible donors who were still considering making pledges of $8,000. What amount of contribution revenue will be recorded? a. $55,000 b. $63,000 c. $8,000 d. Zero 18. A donor makes a pledge to the zoo of $8,000 that will be paid in four installments of $2,000 each this year. The first installment of $2,000 is mailed in with the pledge card and the zoo will record a. Contribution Revenue – Temporarily Restricted of $8,000 b. Contribution Revenue – Temporarily Restricted of $6,000 c. Contribution Revenue – Unrestricted of $2,000 d. both b and c 19. A local charity received a $1,000 pledge that the donor agrees to pay next year. This is a(n) a. unconditional, unrestricted contribution b. unconditional, restricted contribution c. conditional, unrestricted contribution d. conditional, restricted contribution 20.A woman cleans out her attic and takes her thirty-year old clothes to her local Goodwill store. She estimates she could get $50 for these if she held a garage sale. The Goodwill store sorts the clothes and determines they cannot be used or sold and puts them in the pile that will go to the landfill. Goodwill should record a. a loss equal to amount of the dumping fee c. nothing b. a $50 unrestricted contribution d. a $50 unrestricted contribution net of the dumping fee 21. The League of Women Voters meets once a month in a conference room that is made available free by a local hotel and spends $25 for coffee and cookies at the hotel. The normal rental rate for this room is $150. The League will record a. nothing b. $150 temporarily restricted contribution c. $125 unrestricted contribution d. $150 unrestricted contribution 22. A local corporation provides blankets worth $5,000 during a winter blizzard to be handed out by the homeless shelter to the needy. The shelter will record a. an unrestricted contribution of $5,000 b. an asset and liability of $5,000 each c. a temporarily restricted contribution of $5,000 d. none of the above 23.A contributed service may be recognized as contribution revenue if it is a a. service that helps the organization b. specialized skill possessed by the individual c. skill the organization normally purchases d. b and c 24. A Certified Public Accountant provides 100 hours of free audit services to a local museum that is valued at $50 an hour and also helps out by spending 100 hours helping clean and landscape the grounds. The museum would record contribution revenue of a. $5,000 b. $10,000 c. zero d. none of the above 25. A sculpture worth $22,000 is donated to a botanical garden that has an outdoor sculpture park. The botanical garden has decided to capitalize their sculpture collection so the donation would be recorded as a a. unrestricted contribution b. permanently restricted contribution c. temporarily restricted contribution d. invested in capital assets net of related debt 26. A viewer makes a $100 pledge to the local public broadcasting station and receives a coffee mug valued at $2 in return. The station will record contribution revenue in the amount of a. $100 b. $98 c. $102 d. zero 27.Supporting services include a. fund-raising activities b. membership development c. management and general d. all of the above 28.Not-for-profit organizations record capital assets in the a. capital asset account b. property and equipment account c. depreciation account d. net assets account 29. Not-for-profit organizations classify net assets as a. conditional or unconditional b. restricted or unrestricted c. temporarily restricted, permanently restricted or unrestricted d. restricted, unrestricted and invested in capital assets net of related debt 30. Investment income or net appreciation generated from unrestricted donated assets should be reported a. as a change in unrestricted net assets b. where the donor specified c. as a change in cash d. as a change in contributions 31. FASB Statement No. 124 requires that losses on investments of a donor-restricted endowment fund will a. reduce temporarily restricted net assets first b. reduce the endowment c. reduce unrestricted net assets first d. be charged off as an expense 32. The basic financial statements for a not-for-profit opera society include a a. Statement of Activities b. Statement of Net Assets c. Statement of Budget to Actual d. Balance Sheet 33. The basic financial statements for the American Red Cross include a. Statement of Net Assets b. Statement of Functional Expenses c. Statement of Budget to Actual d. all of the above 34. The Statement of Functional Expenses is only required for a. art museums b. labor unions c. religious organizations d. voluntary health and welfare organizations 35. The Statement of Financial Position classifies assets, liabilities and net assets by a. fund b. program or supporting service c. unrestricted, temporarily restricted or permanently restricted d. revenues or expense 36. The primary government’s financial reporting entity includes a. organizations for which the primary government is an issuer of conduit debt b. organizations for which the primary government is financially accountable c. organizations that receive grants from the primary government d. organizations that collect taxes for the primary government 37. Financial accountability exists if the primary government a. collects taxes for the entity but cannot c. cannot impose its will on the organization impose its will on the entity b. appoints a majority of the governing body d. appoints a majority of the governing body and is responsible to fund any deficit and collects taxes and issues conduit debt incurred by the organization for the entity 38. A primary government would have a potential financial benefit or burden from another organization if the primary government can a. modify the organization’s budget b. use the organization’s resources 39. c. modify the organization’s fees d. appoint the organization’s finance director Component units are a. all other legally separate governmental entities that are located within a county b. all funds of the primary government c. other organizations that should be included to prevent the financial statements from being misleading d. all entities that participate in an external pool 40. A component unit is blended if a. the primary government can use or access c. the primary government is obligated in the organization’s resources some manner to repay the debt of the organization b. the primary government can impose its d. the governing bodies of the component will and appoint a majority of the unit and the primary government are governing board substantially the same 41. Discretely presented component units are shown on the government-wide financial statements a. in a separate column(s) of the Statement of Net Assets b. blended with the primary government’s data c. only as a footnote disclosure d. in the governmental activities column of the Statement of Net Assets 42. The Management’s Discussion and Analysis a. is optional under the GASB Statement No. c. should provide an analysis of significant 34 financial reporting model variations between the original and final budget b. should only discuss events that occurred d. should include all notes to the financial during the fiscal year statements 43.Required governmental fund financial statements include a. Statement of Net Assets and Statement of c. Balance Sheet and Statement of Revenues, Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in Expenditures and Changes in Fund Fund Balances Balances b. Balance Sheet and Statement of Activities d. Statement of Net Assets and Statement of Activities 44.A government must designate major and nonmajor funds for a. all fund categories c. each governmental and proprietary fund b. each governmental and fiduciary fund d. each governmental and enterprise fund 45. The major funds of a financial reporting entity would a. be presented in a separate column in the government-wide statements b. always include the General fund c. include an Enterprise fund if its assets are 10% or more of the corresponding element for all funds d. both a and b 46. What are the two major sections of the Governmental Funds Balance Sheet? a. Assets; Liabilities and Fund Balances b. Net Assets; Liabilities and Fund Equity c. Assets and Liabilities; Net Assets d. Assets; Liabilities and Net Assets 47. On the fund financial statements, assets and liabilities are a. listed in alphabetical order b. classified as reserved and unreserved c. listed in order of relative liquidity d. classified as unrestricted, temporarily restricted or permanently restricted 48.On the Governmental Funds Balance Sheet there is a separate column for a. each governmental fund and a total for all c. the General fund, major governmental governmental funds funds combined, nonmajor funds combined, and a total of all funds b. the General fund, each major d. each major governmental fund, nonmajor governmental fund, and a total of all governmental funds combined, and a total component unit governmental funds of all governmental funds 49. The governmental fund financial statements must include a. component unit governmental fund totals b. a summary reconciliation to the government-wide financial statements c. the classification of fund balance as designated and undesignated d. details of the six-step conversion to the government-wide financial statements 50. In the conversion from the governmental fund financial statements to the government-wide statements, the amount of capital assets and accumulated depreciation are a. included as a capital outlay expenditure b. added as noncurrent assets c. increase the amount of total net assets d. both b and c 51. The reconciliation of total governmental fund balances on the Governmental Funds Balance Sheet to net assets of governmental activities in the government-wide Statement of Net Assets includes a. adding assets and liabilities of Internal Service funds c. adding other long-term assets that are deferred in the funds b. adding general long-term liabilities d. all of the above 52.In the conversion to the government-wide financial statements, assets and liabilities of the Internal Service funds are a. added to the governmental activities assets c. added to the component unit assets and and liabilities liabilities b. added to the business-type activities assets d. not reported and liabilities 53. In the conversion of the governmental fund financial statements to the government-wide statements the amount of long-term debt issued during the year is converted from a. Bond Proceeds Revenue to Bonds Payable c. Other Financing Sources to Bonds Liability Payable Liability b. Bonds Payable Liability to Other d. Cash with Fiscal Agent to Other Financing Financing Sources Sources 54.In the consolidation process of preparing the government-wide financial statements a. interfund transfers between governmental c. interfund borrowings between funds are consolidated and eliminated governmental and proprietary funds are totaled up and netted out b. internal balances between governmental d. all of the above and proprietary funds are eliminated 55. Proprietary fund financial statements a. are prepared using the economic resources c. classify all funds as major or nonmajor measurement focus b. include a Statement of Activities d. all of the above 56.The Proprietary Funds Statement of Net Assets classifies net assets as a. restricted and unrestricted b. invested in capital assets net of related debt; reserved and unreserved c. designated and undesignated d. invested in capital assets net of related debt; restricted and unrestricted 57.The required government-wide financial statements include the a. Balance Sheet and Statement of Activities c. Statement of Activities and Statement of Net Assets b. Reconciliation Schedule, Statement of Net d. Six-step Conversion Worksheet, Assets and Statement of Cash Flows Statement of Activities and Statement of Net Assets 58. The government-wide Statement of Net Assets a. displays the net cost of providing governmental services b. displays a separate column for governmental activities, business-type activities, total primary government and component unit data c. classifies net assets as invested in capital assets, net of related debt; reserved; or unreserved d. all of the above 59. Which of the following are allocated when preparing the government-wide Statement of Activities? a. Depreciation expense for general infrastructure b. Interest expense on general obligation bonds c. Depreciation expense for assets associated with identified functions d. All indirect expenses 60. The government-wide Statement of Activities requires revenues to be identified as a. either general or program b. either operating or nonoperating c. either exchange or nonexchange d. either governmental or business-type 61. The government-wide Statement of Activities a. presents the net expense or revenue of the c. presents the net expense or revenue of the governmental and business-type activities governmental and business-type activities of the primary government of each component unit b. presents the net expense or revenue of d. both a and c each fund of the primary government 62. Required Supplementary Information for the financial reporting model includes a. Management’s Discussion and Analysis c. Budgetary Comparison Schedules b. information about defined benefit pension d. all of the above plan funding 63. In what account would the General fund record a loan to an Enterprise fund? a. Tax Anticipation Notes Payable b. Due from Other Funds c. Due to Other Funds d. Fund Balance 64.A proprietary fund would record inventory using a. the purchase method b. the consumption method c. either a or b d. none of the above 65. If the purchase method of recording inventory is used and there is a large amount of inventory on hand at fiscal year end, the inventory would a. be recorded as a liability b. not require an entry c. be recorded as a prepaid expense d. be recorded as an asset with an offsetting reserve of fund balance 66. A governmental fund would record the annual premium for liability insurance in a. an expense account b. a prepaid asset account c. an amortized premium account d. both a and b 67. Noncurrent assets are recorded in a. alphabetical order b. Enterprise funds c. the General Fund d. both b and c 68.Which of the following would be classified as a restricted asset a. General fund designates $100,000 for city hall expansion project b. Enterprise fund designates $30,000 for purchase of equipment c. General fund designates unrestricted donation d. Enterprise fund designates revenues for repayment of revenue bond principal and interest 69. A street light could be classified as a. a capital asset b. infrastructure c. part of a network of assets d. all of the above 70. Inexhaustible capital assets are a. depreciated over the anticipated useful life b. recorded as infrastructure c. depreciated under the modified approach d. not depreciated 71. Which of the following is NOT required under the modified approach to reporting infrastructure? a. Estimate of annual replacement cost of infrastructure at established condition level b. Estimate of annual funding needed to maintain and preserve infrastructure at established condition level c. Complete condition assessment of infrastructure every three years d. Current inventory of infrastructure assets 72. An Enterprise fund would record the payment of debt service principal in what account? a. Bonds Payable (long-term liability) c. Other Financing Uses b. Debt Service Principal Expenditure d. Due to Other Funds 73. An accrued interest liability is recorded at fiscal year-end for outstanding interest on bonds in a. a Debt Service fund b. a Cash with Fiscal Agent fund c. an Enterprise fund d. none of the above 74. A deferred revenue account is used to record a. revenue that has not been received and is unearned b. unamortized premiums c. revenue that has been received but is unearned d. unrealized gains and losses 75. The General fund would record the amount it owes the Utility fund for electricity in what account? a. Internal Balances b. Due to Utility Fund c. Electric Expense d. Advance to Utility Fund 76. The General fund would record the issuance of general obligation bonds as a a. debit to General Obligation Bonds Payable b. debit to Other Financing Sources c. credit to General Obligation Bonds Payable d. none of the above 77.Term bonds are a. generally issued to achieve level debt service b. a current liability because they have a call feature c. classified as long-term if they have a take-out agreement d. issued with the entire amount of principal due at the same time 78. Compensated absences should be recorded as a liability a. at the start of each fiscal c. year for the estimated value of the annual benefit b. when earned if employees d. will be paid for unused vacation time upon retirement when employees are compensated for sick time when employees are compensated for either sick time or vacation time 79.A government should record a claims and judgments liability when a. a lawsuit is filed c. b. it is probable a claim will be d. paid the amount of the claim can be estimated both b and c 80.A state requires local governments to provide free health care to homeless individuals that meet state guidelines and provides funding for the program. The local government will record these monies as a(n) a. exchange transaction for heath care b. imposed nonexchange transaction c. government-mandated nonexchange transaction d. voluntary nonexchange transaction 81. The state government requires a city to clean up a toxic waste site and provides $3,000,000 to assist with the clean up. The city will record the $3,000,000 grant from the state when a. the site is cleaned up b. the grant is awarded and eligibility requirements have been met c. the monies are received from the state d. either b or c, whichever is first 82.Eligibility requirements may include a. required characteristics of recipients b. time requirements c. contingencies d. all of the above 83. A citizen donates $5,000,000 to fund construction of a new public recreational center with the requirement that the city obtain additional donations in the amount of $3,000,000. The $5,000,000 will be recognized by the city when a. it is pledged b. it is paid c. it is earned d. the additional $3,000,000 in donations are obtained 84. A city utility receives a donation that is restricted for a specific purpose. The donation will be recorded as a. deferred revenue b. revenue when received c. restricted net assets until expended for the purpose d. both b and c 85. A citizen donates $1,000,000 for the public library to purchase books. This donation is a(n) a. exchange-like transaction b. escheat of property c. voluntary nonexchange transaction d. imposed tax revenue 86.A corporate income tax is a(n) a. imposed nonexchange revenue b. government-mandated nonexchange transaction c. derived tax revenue d. voluntary nonexchange transaction 87.Property taxes are recognized as available in the current fiscal year if they will be received within a. the fiscal year c. 60 days after fiscal year end b. 30 days after fiscal year end 88. d. 90 days after fiscal year end The property tax levy of $7,000,000 is recorded with an estimate that 5% will be uncollectible. At the end of the fiscal year, the city estimates that 10% of the total levy will remain unpaid 60 days after fiscal year-end. The amount of property tax revenue to be recorded for the fiscal year is a. $5,950,000 b. $6,000,000 c. $6,300,000 d. $6,650,000 89. A property tax levy of $10,000,000 was 90% collected on the date that it became delinquent. The original estimate of uncollectible was 5% and is revised to 2% on the remaining $1,000,000 delinquent property taxes to be collected. The entry to adjust the amount of estimated uncollectible taxes on the delinquent date will require a a. debit to Property Tax Revenue of $480,000 b. credit to Allowance for Uncollectible Property Taxes Current for $480,000 c. credit to Allowance for Uncollectible Property Taxes Delinquent for $500,000 d. credit to Allowance for Uncollectible Property Taxes Delinquent for $20,000 90. The city estimates that $3,000,000 in sales tax revenue has been collected at the time of the underlying exchange transactions and will be available to pay governmental expenditures when it is remitted by the end of the month. The entry to record this information will a. debit Deferred Revenue for $3,000,000 b. credit Deferred Revenue for $3,000,000 c. credit Sales Tax Revenue for $3,000,000 d. credit Sales Tax Receivable for $3,000,000 91. A citizen pays a quarterly estimate of personal income tax to the city. This quarterly estimate will be recorded by the city as a. credit to Deferred Revenue b. debit to Income Tax Revenues c. credit to Cash d. credit to Income Tax Revenues 92. A woman traveling on business checks out of her hotel room and pays the hotel bill that includes $18 in city hotel taxes that are used to pay off debt to construct a convention center. The hotel taxes of $18 will be recorded by the city when a. the hotel room is reserved b. the hotel bill is prepared c. the hotel bill is paid d. none of the above 93. A dog owner pays a dog license fee to the local village where he resides. The village will record the dog license fee revenue on a. the date the dog license notice is mailed b. the due date for renewal of dog licenses c. the date the dog licenses become delinquent d. the date that the dog owner pays the fee 94.The General fund receives a state appropriation of $2,000,000 that is required by law to be used to distribute nutritional supplements to all pregnant women who apply and meet certain income requirements. The General fund will recognize the $2,000,000 appropriation when a. the state appropriation is enacted b. the pregnant women apply for the supplements c. the entire $2,000,000 is spent on eligible applicants d. when available and eligible pregnant women are identified 95. Service-type special assessment billings for garbage collection by a city will be recorded as a. a debit to Property Taxes Receivable b. a credit to Special Assessments Receivable c. a credit to Garbage Collection Revenue d. no entry is required 96.A refundable customer deposit of $150 is paid to a city utility fund that will record it as a. a credit to Cash b. a credit to Customer’s Deposits Payable from Restricted Assets c. a credit to Customer Deposit Revenue d. a credit to Other Financing Sources 97. Expenses are a. recorded in governmental funds using the c. recorded in proprietary funds using the modified accrual method of accounting accrual method of accounting b. recorded in proprietary funds when paid d. never recorded in fiduciary funds 98. The General fund transfers $500,000 to the Debt Service fund for principal and interest payments on long-term debt. This General fund would record a. a debit to Due from Debt Service fund b. a debit to Other Financing Uses Operating Transfers Out c. a credit to Nonreciprocal Interfund Transfers d. a debit to Nonreciprocal Interfund Transfers 99. The General fund makes a residual equity transfer $50,000 to an Internal Service fund to purchase fleet equipment. This is an example of a(n) a. quasi-external transfer of funds b. reciprocal interfund loan c. nonreciprocal transfer of capital d. due to other funds 100. A county bills and collects property taxes from property holders for the county property tax, the local school property tax, and the local transportation authority property tax. When taxes are paid by taxpayers, the transaction to record the initial receipt of cash will be recorded in the a. General fund b. Agency fund c. Special Revenue fund d. Private-Purpose Trust fund 101. The budget serves as a blueprint for a. planning b. control c. evaluation d. all of the above 102. The city Park Permanent fund spends $2,000,000 for public park improvements. This payment will be recorded in the Park Permanent fund as a debit to the following account: a. Encumbrance b. Expense c. Expenditure d. Cash 103. An unusual, nonrecurring expenditure is recorded in a. Expenditures b. Miscellaneous Expenditures c. Appropriations d. Other Financing Uses 104. The city estimates revenues will be $18,300,000 for the next fiscal year and the City Council authorizes spending of $19,000,000. The entry to record the budget will a. decrease Budgetary Fund Balance b. decrease Appropriations c. increase Budgetary Fund Balance d. increase Expenditures 105. The village estimates revenues of $17,000,000 and will sell a tract of public land for $1,500,000 during the next fiscal year. The Village Council authorizes general government spending of $16,800,000 and also approves the city water utility budget that estimates water sales at $2,000,000 and expenses of $1,900,000. The entry to record the budget General fund will a. debit Estimated Revenues for $18,500,000 c. debit Estimated Revenues for $19,000,000 b. debit Estimated Other Financing Sources d. debit Estimated Revenues for $20,500,000 for $1,500,000 106. At the end of the fiscal year Revenues were $36,400,000. Estimated Revenues were recorded at the beginning of the fiscal year for $35,200,000. The entry to close Revenues and Estimated Revenues at the end of the fiscal year will record a a. credit to Revenues of $36,400,000 b. credit to Estimated Revenues of $36,400,000 c. debit to Budgetary Fund Balance of $1,200,000 d. credit to Budgetary Fund Balance of $1,200,000 107. A Capital Projects fund receives $30,000,000 in proceeds of general obligation bonds and contracts for the construction of a new public safety department building for $29,000,000. The unexpended balance of $1,000,000 will be reflected in what account? a. Encumbrances b. Building Funds c. Expenditures d. Unreserved Fund Balance

1.Not-for-profit health care organization financial statements include a
a. Statement of Cash Flows
b. Statement of Activities

c. Statement of Revenues, Expenses, and
Changes in Fund Balance
d. Statement of Budget to Actual

2. Not-for-profit health care organization financial statements include a
a. Statement of Net Assets
b. Statement of Activities

c. Statement of Operations
d. Statement of Budget to Actual

3.A not-for-profit health care organization Statement of Operations displays the
a. cash balance at the end of the year
b. amount of operating income

c. net cash used by operating activities
d. classified net assets

4. When the Allowance for Doubtful Accounts is adjusted, the expense is charged to
a. Charity Care
b. Provision for Bad Debts

c. Doubtful Account Expenses
d. Reservation of Fund Equity

5.Public colleges and universities follow accounting standards issued by
a. GASB
b. FASB
6.

c. AICPA
d. NACUBO

GASB Statement No. 35 requires governmental colleges and universities to
a. follow the GASB Statement No. 34
financial reporting model
b. produce a Statement of Operations

c. use the 1995 AICPA Audits of Colleges
and Universities financial reporting model
d. only use the modified approach for
infrastructure assets

7. A college or university is classified as governmental if
a. the governing board is appointed by the
c. the governing board is publicly elected
college president
b. the university pays corporate income taxes d. all of the above
8. The Coleville Community College can levy taxes, issue tax-exempt debt and the governing board
is publicly elected. The Coleville Community College is a
a. private not-for-profit organization
b. governmental organization

c. business-type activity
d. both b and c are correct

9. Governmental colleges and universities implementing GASB Statements No. 34 and 35 will
a. no longer use funds

c. use invested in capital assets net of related
debt, restricted and unrestricted net asset
classes
b. use restricted, unrestricted and temporarily d. none of the above
restricted net asset classes
10.Colleges and universities may elect to record transactions directly into net asset classes rather than
a. the Statement of Activities
b. the Statement of Operations

c. funds
d. liabilities

11. Governmental colleges and universities display student financial aid as a(n)
a. discount
b. expense

c. it is not displayed
d. expenditure

12.A public college provides scholarship assistance of $8,000,000 to its students. When the students
register for classes the college applies $7,500,000 of the financial aid to their tuition and fee bills
of $10,000,000 and students receive $500,000 in cash. The amount that will be recognized as
tuition and fee revenue by the college is
a. $10,000,000
b. $2,000,000

c. $2,500,000
d. $9,500,000

13. A public university bills $80,000,000 in tuition and fees and provides $23,000,000 in financial
aid. The university refunds in cash $800,000 of this financial aid directly to students.
What amount will the university report as tuition and fee revenue?
a. $80,000,000
b. $79,200,000

c. $57,000,000
d. $57,800,000

14. A public college has tuition and fee billings of $30,000,000 and provides $6,000,000 in financial
aid to students. The students apply $5,200,000 of this financial aid to their tuition and fee bill and
take the excess in cash. What amount is reported as an expense for financial aid?
a. $6,000,000
b. $5,200,000

c. $800,000
d. $6,800,000

15.A public college and university have tuition and fee revenue of $18,000,000 for the summer
semester that bridges two fiscal years. Sixty percent of the instruction takes place in the next
fiscal year and the university decides to allocate the revenue on that basis. The journal entry to
record this transaction in the current fiscal year will include
a. $10,800,000 in revenue

c. $10,800,000 in deferred revenue

b. $18,000,000 in revenue

d. $7,200,000 in deferred revenue

16.A patron gets a call from the Metropolitan Opera Society and pledges $1,000 to be used for general
operations. The Metropolitan Opera Society will record
a. Contribution Revenue – Unrestricted
b. Contribution Revenue – Temporarily
Restricted

c. Contribution Revenue – Permanently
Restricted
d. nothing because it is only an oral pledge

17.The Humane Society conducts a fund-raising drive by telephone and has total pledges of $55,000
and notes on other possible donors who were still considering making pledges of $8,000. What
amount of contribution revenue will be recorded?
a. $55,000
b. $63,000

c. $8,000
d. Zero

18. A donor makes a pledge to the zoo of $8,000 that will be paid in four installments of $2,000 each
this year. The first installment of $2,000 is mailed in with the pledge card and the zoo will record
a. Contribution Revenue – Temporarily
Restricted of $8,000
b. Contribution Revenue – Temporarily
Restricted of $6,000

c. Contribution Revenue – Unrestricted of
$2,000
d. both b and c

19. A local charity received a $1,000 pledge that the donor agrees to pay next year. This is a(n)
a. unconditional, unrestricted contribution
b. unconditional, restricted contribution

c. conditional, unrestricted contribution
d. conditional, restricted contribution

20.A woman cleans out her attic and takes her thirty-year old clothes to her local Goodwill store. She
estimates she could get $50 for these if she held a garage sale. The Goodwill store sorts the
clothes and determines they cannot be used or sold and puts them in the pile that will go to the
landfill. Goodwill should record
a. a loss equal to amount of the dumping fee c. nothing
b. a $50 unrestricted contribution
d. a $50 unrestricted contribution net of the
dumping fee
21. The League of Women Voters meets once a month in a conference room that is made available
free by a local hotel and spends $25 for coffee and cookies at the hotel. The normal rental rate
for this room is $150. The League will record
a. nothing
b. $150 temporarily restricted contribution

c. $125 unrestricted contribution
d. $150 unrestricted contribution

22. A local corporation provides blankets worth $5,000 during a winter blizzard to be handed out by
the homeless shelter to the needy. The shelter will record

a. an unrestricted contribution of $5,000
b. an asset and liability of $5,000 each

c. a temporarily restricted contribution of
$5,000
d. none of the above

23.A contributed service may be recognized as contribution revenue if it is a
a. service that helps the organization
b. specialized skill possessed by the
individual

c. skill the organization normally purchases
d. b and c

24. A Certified Public Accountant provides 100 hours of free audit services to a local museum that is
valued at $50 an hour and also helps out by spending 100 hours helping clean and landscape the
grounds. The museum would record contribution revenue of
a. $5,000
b. $10,000

c. zero
d. none of the above

25. A sculpture worth $22,000 is donated to a botanical garden that has an outdoor sculpture park.
The botanical garden has decided to capitalize their sculpture collection so the donation would be
recorded as a
a. unrestricted contribution
b. permanently restricted contribution

c. temporarily restricted contribution
d. invested in capital assets net of related
debt

26. A viewer makes a $100 pledge to the local public broadcasting station and receives a coffee mug
valued at $2 in return. The station will record contribution revenue in the amount of
a. $100
b. $98

c. $102
d. zero

27.Supporting services include
a. fund-raising activities
b. membership development

c. management and general
d. all of the above

28.Not-for-profit organizations record capital assets in the
a. capital asset account
b. property and equipment account

c. depreciation account
d. net assets account

29. Not-for-profit organizations classify net assets as
a. conditional or unconditional
b. restricted or unrestricted

c. temporarily restricted, permanently
restricted or unrestricted
d. restricted, unrestricted and invested in
capital assets net of related debt

30. Investment income or net appreciation generated from unrestricted donated assets should be
reported
a. as a change in unrestricted net assets
b. where the donor specified

c. as a change in cash
d. as a change in contributions

31. FASB Statement No. 124 requires that losses on investments of a donor-restricted endowment
fund will
a. reduce temporarily restricted net assets
first
b. reduce the endowment

c. reduce unrestricted net assets first
d. be charged off as an expense

32. The basic financial statements for a not-for-profit opera society include a
a. Statement of Activities
b. Statement of Net Assets

c. Statement of Budget to Actual
d. Balance Sheet

33. The basic financial statements for the American Red Cross include
a. Statement of Net Assets
b. Statement of Functional Expenses

c. Statement of Budget to Actual
d. all of the above

34. The Statement of Functional Expenses is only required for
a. art museums
b. labor unions

c. religious organizations
d. voluntary health and welfare organizations

35. The Statement of Financial Position classifies assets, liabilities and net assets by
a. fund
b. program or supporting service

c. unrestricted, temporarily restricted or
permanently restricted
d. revenues or expense

36. The primary government’s financial reporting entity includes
a. organizations for which the primary
government is an issuer of conduit debt
b. organizations for which the primary
government is financially accountable

c. organizations that receive grants from the
primary government
d. organizations that collect taxes for the
primary government

37. Financial accountability exists if the primary government
a. collects taxes for the entity but cannot
c. cannot impose its will on the organization
impose its will on the entity
b. appoints a majority of the governing body d. appoints a majority of the governing body
and is responsible to fund any deficit
and collects taxes and issues conduit debt
incurred by the organization
for the entity

38. A primary government would have a potential financial benefit or burden from another
organization if the primary government can
a. modify the organization’s budget
b. use the organization’s resources
39.

c. modify the organization’s fees
d. appoint the organization’s finance director

Component units are
a. all other legally separate governmental
entities that are located within a county
b. all funds of the primary government

c. other organizations that should be
included to prevent the financial
statements from being misleading
d. all entities that participate in an external
pool

40. A component unit is blended if
a. the primary government can use or access c. the primary government is obligated in
the organization’s resources
some manner to repay the debt of the
organization
b. the primary government can impose its
d. the governing bodies of the component
will and appoint a majority of the
unit and the primary government are
governing board
substantially the same
41. Discretely presented component units are shown on the government-wide financial statements
a. in a separate column(s) of the Statement
of Net Assets
b. blended with the primary government’s
data

c. only as a footnote disclosure
d. in the governmental activities column of
the Statement of Net Assets

42. The Management’s Discussion and Analysis
a. is optional under the GASB Statement No. c. should provide an analysis of significant
34 financial reporting model
variations between the original and final
budget
b. should only discuss events that occurred d. should include all notes to the financial
during the fiscal year
statements
43.Required governmental fund financial statements include
a. Statement of Net Assets and Statement of c. Balance Sheet and Statement of Revenues,
Revenues, Expenditures and Changes in
Expenditures and Changes in Fund
Fund Balances
Balances
b. Balance Sheet and Statement of Activities d. Statement of Net Assets and Statement of
Activities
44.A government must designate major and nonmajor funds for
a. all fund categories

c. each governmental and proprietary fund

b. each governmental and fiduciary fund

d. each governmental and enterprise fund

45. The major funds of a financial reporting entity would
a. be presented in a separate column in the
government-wide statements
b. always include the General fund

c. include an Enterprise fund if its assets are
10% or more of the corresponding element
for all funds
d. both a and b

46. What are the two major sections of the Governmental Funds Balance Sheet?
a. Assets; Liabilities and Fund Balances
b. Net Assets; Liabilities and Fund Equity

c. Assets and Liabilities; Net Assets
d. Assets; Liabilities and Net Assets

47. On the fund financial statements, assets and liabilities are
a. listed in alphabetical order
b. classified as reserved and unreserved

c. listed in order of relative liquidity
d. classified as unrestricted, temporarily
restricted or permanently restricted

48.On the Governmental Funds Balance Sheet there is a separate column for
a. each governmental fund and a total for all c. the General fund, major governmental
governmental funds
funds combined, nonmajor funds
combined, and a total of all funds
b. the General fund, each major
d. each major governmental fund, nonmajor
governmental fund, and a total of all
governmental funds combined, and a total
component unit governmental funds
of all governmental funds
49. The governmental fund financial statements must include
a. component unit governmental fund totals
b. a summary reconciliation to the
government-wide financial statements

c. the classification of fund balance as
designated and undesignated
d. details of the six-step conversion to the
government-wide financial statements

50. In the conversion from the governmental fund financial statements to the government-wide
statements, the amount of capital assets and accumulated depreciation are
a. included as a capital outlay expenditure
b. added as noncurrent assets

c. increase the amount of total net assets
d. both b and c

51. The reconciliation of total governmental fund balances on the Governmental Funds Balance Sheet
to net assets of governmental activities in the government-wide Statement of Net Assets includes
a. adding assets and liabilities of Internal
Service funds

c. adding other long-term assets that are
deferred in the funds

b. adding general long-term liabilities

d. all of the above

52.In the conversion to the government-wide financial statements, assets and liabilities of the Internal
Service funds are
a. added to the governmental activities assets c. added to the component unit assets and
and liabilities
liabilities
b. added to the business-type activities assets d. not reported
and liabilities
53. In the conversion of the governmental fund financial statements to the government-wide
statements the amount of long-term debt issued during the year is converted from
a. Bond Proceeds Revenue to Bonds Payable c. Other Financing Sources to Bonds
Liability
Payable Liability
b. Bonds Payable Liability to Other
d. Cash with Fiscal Agent to Other Financing
Financing Sources
Sources
54.In the consolidation process of preparing the government-wide financial statements
a. interfund transfers between governmental c. interfund borrowings between
funds are consolidated and eliminated
governmental and proprietary funds are
totaled up and netted out
b. internal balances between governmental
d. all of the above
and proprietary funds are eliminated
55. Proprietary fund financial statements
a. are prepared using the economic resources c. classify all funds as major or nonmajor
measurement focus
b. include a Statement of Activities
d. all of the above
56.The Proprietary Funds Statement of Net Assets classifies net assets as
a. restricted and unrestricted
b. invested in capital assets net of related
debt; reserved and unreserved

c. designated and undesignated
d. invested in capital assets net of related
debt; restricted and unrestricted

57.The required government-wide financial statements include the
a. Balance Sheet and Statement of Activities c. Statement of Activities and Statement of
Net Assets
b. Reconciliation Schedule, Statement of Net d. Six-step Conversion Worksheet,
Assets and Statement of Cash Flows
Statement of Activities and Statement of
Net Assets
58. The government-wide Statement of Net Assets

a. displays the net cost of providing
governmental services
b. displays a separate column for
governmental activities, business-type
activities, total primary government and
component unit data

c. classifies net assets as invested in capital
assets, net of related debt; reserved; or
unreserved
d. all of the above

59. Which of the following are allocated when preparing the government-wide Statement of
Activities?
a. Depreciation expense for general
infrastructure
b. Interest expense on general obligation
bonds

c. Depreciation expense for assets associated
with identified functions
d. All indirect expenses

60. The government-wide Statement of Activities requires revenues to be identified as
a. either general or program
b. either operating or nonoperating

c. either exchange or nonexchange
d. either governmental or business-type

61. The government-wide Statement of Activities
a. presents the net expense or revenue of the c. presents the net expense or revenue of the
governmental and business-type activities
governmental and business-type activities
of the primary government
of each component unit
b. presents the net expense or revenue of
d. both a and c
each fund of the primary government
62. Required Supplementary Information for the financial reporting model includes
a. Management’s Discussion and Analysis
c. Budgetary Comparison Schedules
b. information about defined benefit pension d. all of the above
plan funding
63. In what account would the General fund record a loan to an Enterprise fund?
a. Tax Anticipation Notes
Payable
b. Due from Other Funds

c. Due to Other Funds
d. Fund Balance

64.A proprietary fund would record inventory using
a. the purchase method
b. the consumption method

c. either a or b
d. none of the above

65. If the purchase method of recording inventory is used and there is a large amount of inventory on
hand at fiscal year end, the inventory would

a. be recorded as a liability
b. not require an entry

c. be recorded as a prepaid expense
d. be recorded as an asset with an
offsetting reserve of fund balance

66. A governmental fund would record the annual premium for liability insurance in
a. an expense account
b. a prepaid asset account

c. an amortized premium account
d. both a and b

67. Noncurrent assets are recorded in
a. alphabetical order
b. Enterprise funds

c. the General Fund
d. both b and c

68.Which of the following would be classified as a restricted asset
a. General fund designates
$100,000 for city hall
expansion project
b. Enterprise fund designates
$30,000 for purchase of
equipment

c. General fund designates unrestricted
donation
d. Enterprise fund designates revenues
for repayment of revenue bond
principal and interest

69. A street light could be classified as
a. a capital asset
b. infrastructure

c. part of a network of assets
d. all of the above

70. Inexhaustible capital assets are
a. depreciated over the
anticipated useful life
b. recorded as infrastructure

c. depreciated under the modified
approach
d. not depreciated

71. Which of the following is NOT required under the modified approach to reporting infrastructure?
a. Estimate of annual
replacement cost of
infrastructure at established
condition level
b. Estimate of annual funding
needed to maintain and
preserve infrastructure at
established condition level

c. Complete condition assessment of
infrastructure every three years
d. Current inventory of infrastructure
assets

72. An Enterprise fund would record the payment of debt service principal in what account?
a. Bonds Payable (long-term
liability)

c. Other Financing Uses

b. Debt Service Principal
Expenditure

d. Due to Other Funds

73. An accrued interest liability is recorded at fiscal year-end for outstanding interest on bonds in
a. a Debt Service fund
b. a Cash with Fiscal Agent
fund

c. an Enterprise fund
d. none of the above

74. A deferred revenue account is used to record
a. revenue that has not been
received and is unearned
b. unamortized premiums

c. revenue that has been received but is
unearned
d. unrealized gains and losses

75. The General fund would record the amount it owes the Utility fund for electricity in what
account?
a. Internal Balances
b. Due to Utility Fund

c. Electric Expense
d. Advance to Utility Fund

76. The General fund would record the issuance of general obligation bonds as a
a. debit to General Obligation
Bonds Payable
b. debit to Other Financing
Sources

c. credit to General Obligation Bonds
Payable
d. none of the above

77.Term bonds are
a. generally issued to achieve
level debt service
b. a current liability because
they have a call feature

c. classified as long-term if they have a
take-out agreement
d. issued with the entire amount of
principal due at the same time

78. Compensated absences should be recorded as a liability
a. at the start of each fiscal
c.
year for the estimated value
of the annual benefit
b. when earned if employees
d.
will be paid for unused
vacation time upon
retirement

when employees are compensated
for sick time
when employees are compensated
for either sick time or vacation
time

79.A government should record a claims and judgments liability when
a. a lawsuit is filed

c.

b. it is probable a claim will be d.
paid

the amount of the claim can be
estimated
both b and c

80.A state requires local governments to provide free health care to homeless individuals that meet
state guidelines and provides funding for the program. The local government will record these
monies as a(n)
a. exchange transaction for heath care
b. imposed nonexchange transaction

c. government-mandated nonexchange
transaction
d. voluntary nonexchange transaction

81. The state government requires a city to clean up a toxic waste site and provides $3,000,000 to
assist with the clean up. The city will record the $3,000,000 grant from the state when
a. the site is cleaned up
b. the grant is awarded and eligibility
requirements have been met

c. the monies are received from the state
d. either b or c, whichever is first

82.Eligibility requirements may include
a. required characteristics of recipients
b. time requirements

c. contingencies
d. all of the above

83. A citizen donates $5,000,000 to fund construction of a new public recreational center with the
requirement that the city obtain additional donations in the amount of $3,000,000. The
$5,000,000 will be recognized by the city when
a. it is pledged
b. it is paid

c. it is earned
d. the additional $3,000,000 in donations are
obtained

84. A city utility receives a donation that is restricted for a specific purpose. The donation will be
recorded as
a. deferred revenue
b. revenue when received

c. restricted net assets until expended for the
purpose
d. both b and c

85. A citizen donates $1,000,000 for the public library to purchase books. This donation is a(n)
a. exchange-like transaction
b. escheat of property

c. voluntary nonexchange transaction
d. imposed tax revenue

86.A corporate income tax is a(n)
a. imposed nonexchange revenue
b. government-mandated nonexchange
transaction

c. derived tax revenue
d. voluntary nonexchange transaction

87.Property taxes are recognized as available in the current fiscal year if they will be received within
a. the fiscal year

c. 60 days after fiscal year end

b. 30 days after fiscal year end
88.

d. 90 days after fiscal year end

The property tax levy of $7,000,000 is recorded with an estimate that 5% will be
uncollectible. At the end of the fiscal year, the city estimates that 10% of the total levy will
remain unpaid 60 days after fiscal year-end. The amount of property tax revenue to be recorded
for the fiscal year is
a. $5,950,000
b. $6,000,000

c. $6,300,000
d. $6,650,000

89. A property tax levy of $10,000,000 was 90% collected on the date that it became delinquent. The
original estimate of uncollectible was 5% and is revised to 2% on the remaining $1,000,000
delinquent property taxes to be collected. The entry to adjust the amount of estimated
uncollectible taxes on the delinquent date will require a
a. debit to Property Tax Revenue of
$480,000
b. credit to Allowance for Uncollectible
Property Taxes Current for $480,000

c. credit to Allowance for Uncollectible
Property Taxes Delinquent for $500,000
d. credit to Allowance for Uncollectible
Property Taxes Delinquent for $20,000

90. The city estimates that $3,000,000 in sales tax revenue has been collected at the time of the
underlying exchange transactions and will be available to pay governmental expenditures when it
is remitted by the end of the month. The entry to record this information will
a. debit Deferred Revenue for $3,000,000
b. credit Deferred Revenue for $3,000,000

c. credit Sales Tax Revenue for $3,000,000
d. credit Sales Tax Receivable for
$3,000,000

91. A citizen pays a quarterly estimate of personal income tax to the city. This quarterly estimate will
be recorded by the city as
a. credit to Deferred Revenue
b. debit to Income Tax Revenues

c. credit to Cash
d. credit to Income Tax Revenues

92. A woman traveling on business checks out of her hotel room and pays the hotel bill that includes
$18 in city hotel taxes that are used to pay off debt to construct a convention center. The hotel
taxes of $18 will be recorded by the city when
a. the hotel room is reserved
b. the hotel bill is prepared

c. the hotel bill is paid
d. none of the above

93. A dog owner pays a dog license fee to the local village where he resides. The village will record
the dog license fee revenue on
a. the date the dog license notice is mailed
b. the due date for renewal of dog licenses

c. the date the dog licenses become
delinquent
d. the date that the dog owner pays the fee

94.The General fund receives a state appropriation of $2,000,000 that is required by law to be used to
distribute nutritional supplements to all pregnant women who apply and meet certain income
requirements. The General fund will recognize the $2,000,000 appropriation when
a. the state appropriation is enacted
b. the pregnant women apply for the
supplements

c. the entire $2,000,000 is spent on eligible
applicants
d. when available and eligible pregnant
women are identified

95. Service-type special assessment billings for garbage collection by a city will be recorded as
a. a debit to Property Taxes Receivable
b. a credit to Special Assessments
Receivable

c. a credit to Garbage Collection Revenue
d. no entry is required

96.A refundable customer deposit of $150 is paid to a city utility fund that will record it as
a. a credit to Cash
b. a credit to Customer’s Deposits Payable
from Restricted Assets

c. a credit to Customer Deposit Revenue
d. a credit to Other Financing Sources

97. Expenses are
a. recorded in governmental funds using the c. recorded in proprietary funds using the
modified accrual method of accounting
accrual method of accounting
b. recorded in proprietary funds when paid
d. never recorded in fiduciary funds
98. The General fund transfers $500,000 to the Debt Service fund for principal and interest payments
on long-term debt. This General fund would record
a. a debit to Due from Debt Service fund
b. a debit to Other Financing Uses Operating Transfers Out

c. a credit to Nonreciprocal Interfund
Transfers
d. a debit to Nonreciprocal Interfund
Transfers

99. The General fund makes a residual equity transfer $50,000 to an Internal Service fund to purchase
fleet equipment. This is an example of a(n)
a. quasi-external transfer of funds
b. reciprocal interfund loan

c. nonreciprocal transfer of capital
d. due to other funds

100. A county bills and collects property taxes from property holders for the county property tax, the
local school property tax, and the local transportation authority property tax. When taxes are paid
by taxpayers, the transaction to record the initial receipt of cash will be recorded in the
a. General fund
b. Agency fund

c. Special Revenue fund
d. Private-Purpose Trust fund

101. The budget serves as a blueprint for
a. planning
b. control

c. evaluation
d. all of the above

102. The city Park Permanent fund spends $2,000,000 for public park improvements. This payment
will be recorded in the Park Permanent fund as a debit to the following account:
a. Encumbrance
b. Expense

c. Expenditure
d. Cash

103. An unusual, nonrecurring expenditure is recorded in
a. Expenditures
b. Miscellaneous Expenditures

c. Appropriations
d. Other Financing Uses

104. The city estimates revenues will be $18,300,000 for the next fiscal year and the City Council
authorizes spending of $19,000,000. The entry to record the budget will
a. decrease Budgetary Fund Balance
b. decrease Appropriations

c. increase Budgetary Fund Balance
d. increase Expenditures

105. The village estimates revenues of $17,000,000 and will sell a tract of public land for $1,500,000
during the next fiscal year. The Village Council authorizes general government spending of
$16,800,000 and also approves the city water utility budget that estimates water sales at
$2,000,000 and expenses of $1,900,000. The entry to record the budget General fund will
a. debit Estimated Revenues for $18,500,000 c. debit Estimated Revenues for $19,000,000
b. debit Estimated Other Financing Sources d. debit Estimated Revenues for $20,500,000
for $1,500,000
106. At the end of the fiscal year Revenues were $36,400,000. Estimated Revenues were recorded at
the beginning of the fiscal year for $35,200,000. The entry to close Revenues and Estimated
Revenues at the end of the fiscal year will record a
a. credit to Revenues of $36,400,000
b. credit to Estimated Revenues of
$36,400,000

c. debit to Budgetary Fund Balance of
$1,200,000
d. credit to Budgetary Fund Balance of
$1,200,000

107. A Capital Projects fund receives $30,000,000 in proceeds of general obligation bonds and
contracts for the construction of a new public safety department building for $29,000,000. The
unexpended balance of $1,000,000 will be reflected in what account?
a. Encumbrances
b. Building Funds

c. Expenditures
d. Unreserved Fund Balance

Read More

CASE Study: Remote Access Attacks Above is the Quick Finance Company network diagram. The company is a small business and does not invest much in security protection. System 1000 hosts a customer database as well as employee payroll systems. The company Web server has been defaced twice this month and the VPN server has suffered from session hijacking and Denial-of-Service (DOS) attacks twice last year. The company does not enforce a password policy and does not have a dedicated security professional. 1. Analyze the Quick Finance Company Network Diagram and describe the assumptions you will need to make in order to identify vulnerabilities and recommend mitigation techniques as there is no further information from this company. The company does not wish to release any security related information per company policy. 2. Analyze the above case and network diagram, and describe how each access point is protected or unprotected. 3. Evaluate and describe the vulnerabilities of the Quick Finance Company’s network based on the network design. 4.Rank the top three (3) most likely network-based attacks in the order they are likely to occur and suggest countermeasures for each. 5. Recommend mitigation procedures to reduce or eliminate business interruptions. 6. Use at least three (3) quality resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and similar Websites do not qualify as quality resources. Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements: • Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA. The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are: • Describe the details and the importance of application security models and their implementation from a management perspective. • Explain access control methods and attacks. • Compare and contrast network-based attacks and countermeasures. • Evaluate potential situations of business interruption and the planning necessary to mitigate the threats involved. • Use technology and information resources to research issues in security management. • Write clearly and concisely about the theories of security management using proper writing mechanics and technical style conventions.

CASE Study:  Remote Access Attacks
Above is the Quick Finance Company network diagram. The company is a small business and does not invest much in security protection. System 1000 hosts a customer database as well as employee payroll systems. The company Web server has been defaced twice this month and the VPN server has suffered from session hijacking and Denial-of-Service (DOS) attacks twice last year. The company does not enforce a password policy and does not have a dedicated security professional.

1. Analyze the Quick Finance Company Network Diagram and describe the assumptions you will need to make in order to identify vulnerabilities and recommend mitigation techniques as there is no further information from this company. The company does not wish to release any security related information per company policy.
2. Analyze the above case and network diagram, and describe how each access point is protected or unprotected.
3. Evaluate and describe the vulnerabilities of the Quick Finance Company’s network based on the network design.

4.Rank the top three (3) most likely network-based attacks in the order they are likely to occur and suggest countermeasures for each.
5. Recommend mitigation procedures to reduce or eliminate business interruptions.
6. Use at least three (3) quality resources in this assignment. Note: Wikipedia and similar Websites do not qualify as quality resources.

Your assignment must follow these formatting requirements:
• Be typed, double spaced, using Times New Roman font (size 12), with one-inch margins on all sides; citations and references must follow APA.

The specific course learning outcomes associated with this assignment are:

• Describe the details and the importance of application security models and their implementation from a management perspective.
• Explain access control methods and attacks.
• Compare and contrast network-based attacks and countermeasures.
• Evaluate potential situations of business interruption and the planning necessary to mitigate the threats involved.
• Use technology and information resources to research issues in security management.
• Write clearly and concisely about the theories of security management using proper writing mechanics and technical style conventions.

Read More

Untitled

ACTVITY ANALYSIS ASSIGNMENT:

NAME OF ACTIVITY: TYING YOUR SHOE LACE

USING THE ACTIVITY ANALYSIS GRID ATTACHED, Analyze the given activity briefly filling out each section.  Do not just answer yes or no but give a brief rationale for each section.

Activity analysis

ACTIVITY ANALYSIS

Name of Activity

 

 

NONE, MIN, MOD, MAX

 

Clinical Reasoning

Visual input needed. Discrimination of color, texture tone, visual acuity    
Perception ,spatial relations, eye hand coordination figure ground    
Sensation Needed?    
Tactile input what type?    
Proprioception and vestibular needed?    
Olfactory input    
Gustatory input    
Auditory input sound or language needed    
Positioning :sitting, standing, lying down    
Gross Motor    
Muscle tone what type?    
Fine Motor    
Joints involved    
Types of pinch needed    
Cognition :Directions simple or complex    
Frustration tolerance    
Time management    
Opportunity to express feelings    
creativity    
sequencing    
Direction following    
Attention span    
Level of Difficulty of activity    
Memory    
Problem solving    
Socialization skills needed    
Home management skills    
Crossing midline    
Bilateral integration    
Safety considerations    
Play/leisure    
work    
ADLs    
education    
Family involvement    
Is it gradable    

 

 

Read More

HIS 101-P01 Final Exam Essay Questions Due: Monday, March 3, 2014 Choose one question from each section below. Your answer should be in the form of a five-paragraph essay, with an introduction and a conclusion, and between two and five paragraphs that address ALL parts of the question. Pay close attention to the time periods outlined in each question. Style and mechanics will be graded, as well as content. Each essay will be worth 20 points on your exam grade. Make sure that you upload your essays to the dropbox by the deadline on the day of the final. No late essays will be accepted. Section 2 This section requires you to use knowledge and examples from the entire course. Pay close attention to the time frame outlined by each question. Your answer to this question should be 2-4 pages in length. Do one essay from this section. 1) Examine the role of the Catholic Church in the development of western civilization. Start with the development of the Catholic Church under Emperor Constantine, and work up to the Reformation. How did the Catholic Church influence politics and life in Western Europe? What were the internal and external issues that plagued the Church over the years? How did these issues eventually fuel the Reformation? 2) Examine the growing centralization of power in European states from the High Middle Ages through the 18th century. How did European states begin to develop centralized institutions during the medieval period? Did all states manage to create a government with central authority over the whole country? Why or why not? Give specific examples. Then discuss the development of absolutism in Europe. Why were states able to create absolute monarchies in the 17th and 18th centuries?

HIS 101-P01
Final Exam
Essay Questions
Due: Monday, March 3, 2014

Choose one question from each section below.  Your answer should be in the form of a five-paragraph essay, with an introduction and a conclusion, and between two and five paragraphs that address ALL parts of the question. Pay close attention to the time periods outlined in each question.  Style and mechanics will be graded, as well as content.  Each essay will be worth 20 points on your exam grade.  Make sure that you upload your essays to the dropbox by the deadline on the day of the final. No late essays will be accepted.

Section 2
This section requires you to use knowledge and examples from the entire course.  Pay close attention to the time frame outlined by each question.  Your answer to this question should be 2-4 pages in length.  Do one essay from this section.

1) Examine the role of the Catholic Church in the development of western civilization.  Start with the development of the Catholic Church under Emperor Constantine, and work up to the Reformation.  How did the Catholic Church influence politics and life in Western Europe?  What were the internal and external issues that plagued the Church over the years?  How did these issues eventually fuel the Reformation?

2) Examine the growing centralization of power in European states from the High Middle Ages through the 18th century.  How did European states begin to develop centralized institutions during the medieval period? Did all states manage to create a government with central authority over the whole country? Why or why not? Give specific examples.  Then discuss the development of absolutism in Europe.  Why were states able to create absolute monarchies in the 17th and 18th centuries?

Read More

*the research paper must include information on the topic from the textbook ” 8th edition of Ronald J. Comer, fundamentals of abnormal psychology”. appropiate statistical information where relevant (prevalence, treatment, and outcomes) should be include in the latest research findings. *Complete description of major theories or main characters or concepts including relevant associations made from the textbook. *extremely well written and documented, concisely organized, completed in spa style, no spelling, grammar errors. *5 or more references, 3-4 citations per page. most references are less than 10 yrs old and peer reviewed. used at least one cross cultural reference. *paper should have a comprehensive theme, or main idea summary. should show significant evidence of originality, organization, and planning. the majority of the content needs to be fresh, original, creative, based upon logical conclusions, and an accurate understanding of reference material.

*the research paper must include information on the topic from the textbook ” 8th edition of Ronald J. Comer, fundamentals of abnormal psychology”.
appropiate statistical information where relevant (prevalence, treatment, and outcomes) should be include in the latest research findings.
*Complete description of major theories or main characters or concepts including relevant associations made from the textbook.
*extremely well written and documented, concisely organized, completed in spa style, no spelling, grammar errors.
*5 or more references, 3-4 citations per page. most references are less than 10 yrs old and peer reviewed. used at least one cross cultural reference.
*paper should have a comprehensive theme, or main idea summary. should show significant evidence of originality, organization, and planning. the majority of the content needs to be fresh, original, creative, based upon logical conclusions, and an accurate understanding of reference material.

Read More

International Politics” • From the second e-Activity, propose two (2) outcomes that you believe offshore drilling would have on the global usage of non-renewable resources overall. Support your rationale with two (2) specific examples of non-renewable resources likely to be affected. • Evaluate the effectiveness of the U.S. government in managing multiple environmental concerns, such as energy security and food security. Justify your response.

International Politics”

  • From the second e-Activity, propose two (2) outcomes that you believe offshore drilling would have on the global usage of non-renewable resources overall. Support your rationale with two (2) specific examples of non-renewable resources likely to be affected.
  • Evaluate the effectiveness of the U.S. government in managing multiple environmental concerns, such as energy security and food security. Justify your response.

 

Read More

Research the process of System Development Life Cycle. Discuss how and why an organization should apply SDLC process. If you work as IT staff in an organization, how you will suggest your team and your manager to implement or improve SDLC process.

Research the process of System Development Life Cycle. Discuss how and why an organization should apply SDLC process. If you work as IT staff in an organization, how you will suggest your team and your manager to implement or improve SDLC process.

Read More

These are the sections which are to be included in the proposal: 1. The Client Brief: Background 2. The Proposal: Objectives 3. The Proposal: Research Design 4. The Proposal: Data Collection – methodology 5. The Proposal: Sampling plan 6. The Proposal: Data Analysis – Minimum of 20 Harvard references including books, Journals, and webpages – The most important parts are the ‘Research Design’, ‘Methodology’ & ‘Sampling Plan’. Therefore, these sections will have to in depth and where most of the words will be distributed. -This has to be done to a ‘Masters’ standard. Therefore, it has to use a very profesional writing style. No jargon etc.

These are the sections which are to be included in the proposal:
1.    The Client Brief: Background
2.    The Proposal: Objectives
3.      The Proposal: Research Design
4.    The Proposal: Data Collection – methodology
5.    The Proposal: Sampling plan
6.      The Proposal: Data Analysis

– Minimum of 20 Harvard references including books, Journals, and webpages
– The most important parts are the ‘Research Design’, ‘Methodology’ & ‘Sampling Plan’. Therefore, these sections will have to in depth and where most of the words will be distributed.
-This has to be done to a ‘Masters’ standard. Therefore, it has to use a very profesional writing style. No jargon etc.

Read More

Course Book: Strategic Management and Business Policy by: Thomas L. Wheelen and J. David Hunger Link to Course Book: http://www.tec-digital.itcr.ac.cr/file/9565503/www.bloomberg.com Required Readings: Chapter 4 Topics: Environmental Scanning and Industry Analysis Instructions Activity #2: Porter’s Industry Analysis (100 points) For this activity, you must analyze General Electric (GE) using Porter’s approach to industry analysis. Obtain annual reports and financial reports from public sources as well as trade, business, and journal articles for information. Your Activity responses should be both grammatically and mechanically correct, and formatted in the same fashion as the Activity itself. If there is a Part A, your response should identify a Part A, etc. In addition, you must appropriately cite all resources used in your response and document in a bibliography using APA style. (100 points) (A 3-page response is required.) Part A Describe GE, what the company stands for (its slogan), what makes it unique, the direction of its market, its products, and the ways in which the company’s products and strategy are integrated. Include a bibliography of at least six (6) trade or journal sources that you use for your description and the analysis which follows. (20 points) Part B Discuss Porter’s approach to industry analysis in relationship to GE using the six (6) forces listed in the figure on page 110 of your text. (42 points) Part C Provide one (1) suggestion for each of the following as it relates to the future of GE: what to watch closely (threats and weaknesses), what to assess for change (opportunities), and what to maintain and build upon (strengths). Then make one (1) recommendation for GE’s next strategic move. (38 points)

Course Book: Strategic Management and Business Policy by: Thomas L. Wheelen and J. David Hunger

Link to Course Book: http://www.tec-digital.itcr.ac.cr/file/9565503/www.bloomberg.com

Required Readings:  Chapter 4        Topics: Environmental Scanning and Industry Analysis

Instructions
Activity #2: Porter’s Industry Analysis (100 points)
For this activity, you must analyze General Electric (GE) using Porter’s approach to industry analysis. Obtain annual reports and financial reports from public sources as well as trade, business, and journal articles for information. Your Activity responses should be both grammatically and mechanically correct, and formatted in the same fashion as the Activity itself. If there is a Part A, your response should identify a Part A, etc. In addition, you must appropriately cite all resources used in your response and document in a bibliography using APA style. (100 points) (A 3-page response is required.)

Part A
Describe GE, what the company stands for (its slogan), what makes it unique, the direction of its market, its products, and the ways in which the company’s products and strategy are integrated. Include a bibliography of at least six (6) trade or journal sources that you use for your description and the analysis which follows. (20 points)

Part B
Discuss Porter’s approach to industry analysis in relationship to GE using the six (6) forces listed in the figure on page 110 of your text. (42 points)

Part C
Provide one (1) suggestion for each of the following as it relates to the future of GE: what to watch closely (threats and weaknesses), what to assess for change (opportunities), and what to maintain and build upon (strengths). Then make one (1) recommendation for GE’s next strategic move. (38 points)

Read More

Logistics and operations management Background Management of International Logistics and Operations and is a vital component when measuring both internal and external success of a business (Bowzarth and Handfield, 2008; Christopher, 2011). Subsequently, both achieving and sustaining customer and company requirements can be considered essential components for both success and survival in the competitive global market of the twenty first century (Kirchmer, 2009). Subsequently, organisations can use a variety of operations tools, techniques, methods and processes in order to ensure they achieve and sustain meeting both customer and company requirements. Task You are required to focus on a specific field (i.e. Supply Chain, Lean Thinking, New Product Development etc.) and apply this field to a business or case study. You should clearly demonstrate how and where this application could assist the Management of Operations and Logistics Management. Your business or case study may be either a service or manufacturing, and you must clearly demonstrate the benefits of application and implementation from an international perspective. It is imperative within your discussion that you clearly address the following points: • Conduct and critique a systems analysis of operational activities within your chosen field and case scope • Apply and critically evaluate analytical tools, techniques, methods and processes to describe operational processes. • Critically evaluate the positive and negative attributes associated with the field in relation to the chosen case. • Explore and analyse the gap between evaluation and implementation of operational and business process improvement. Analyze multidimensional operational issues and apply techniques that could assist in either resolving or significantly reducing problematic operational issues within your chosen field and case scope. • Draw key conclusions from your assignment, that discuss the extent your business or case study has achieved alignment between both its performanceobjectives, and the configuration of its logistical and operational processes in addressing your assignment aim. Format Your assignment should be in a report format, being clearly structured using headings, sub-headings etc. You should include an executive summary (300 words maximum) at the beginning of the report, however, this is not included in your word count. Your assignment should be presented using Times New Roman (TNR) 12 font, 1.5 line spacing, and it should be approximately 5,000 (+/- 10%) words in length. Your word count is from the introduction to conclusion sections. You must endeavour to use theory explicitly at all stages, but do not spend time describing a theory. While you must be explicit about the theories, models, etc. that you use, you can assume that the reader is familiar with them. What the reader does want, is clear evidence of your ability to understand and critically apply the theory, in order to support the development of your findings and/or ideas in relation to testing your assignment aim. You must cite all sources on which you have relied, for example textbooks, journal articles etc. using the Harvard Bibliographic Referencing System. Please be aware that if you do not cite all sources, then you may be accused of plagiarism, and that may endanger your success in passing the module. If you are in any doubt about how to reference your work, please obtain guidance from the library and/or your academic librarian(s) for this module. Please do use illustrations, tables, etc. wherever these are helpful, and remember that these do not count towards your word limit. If you do use these, please do not put them in the appendices if they are part of your discussion. Appendices are the appropriate places to put supporting material, however, remember if the reader is satisfied with the main points of your discussion; the supporting information within the appendices may not even be reviewed.

Logistics and operations management

 

Background

Management of International Logistics and Operations and is a vital component when measuring both internal and external success of a business (Bowzarth and Handfield, 2008; Christopher, 2011). Subsequently, both achieving and sustaining customer and company requirements can be considered essential components for both success and survival in the competitive global market of the twenty first century (Kirchmer, 2009). Subsequently, organisations can use a variety of operations tools, techniques, methods and processes in order to ensure they achieve and sustain meeting both customer and company requirements.

 

 

Task

 

You are required to focus on a specific field (i.e. Supply Chain, Lean Thinking, New Product Development etc.) and apply this field to a business or case study. You should clearly demonstrate how and where this application could assist the Management of Operations and Logistics Management. Your business or case study may be either a service or manufacturing, and you must clearly demonstrate the benefits of application and implementation from an international perspective. It is imperative within your discussion that you clearly address the following points:

 

• Conduct and critique a systems analysis of operational activities within your chosen field and case scope

 

• Apply and critically evaluate analytical tools, techniques, methods and processes to describe operational processes.

 

• Critically evaluate the positive and negative attributes associated with the field in relation to the chosen case.

 

• Explore and analyse the gap between evaluation and implementation of operational and business process improvement.

 

Analyze multidimensional operational issues and apply techniques that could assist in either resolving or significantly reducing problematic operational issues within your chosen field and case scope.

 

• Draw key conclusions from your assignment, that discuss the extent your business or case study has achieved alignment between both its performanceobjectives, and the configuration of its logistical and operational processes in addressing your assignment aim.

 

 

 

Format

 

Your assignment should be in a report format, being clearly structured using headings, sub-headings etc. You should include an executive summary (300 words maximum) at the beginning of the report, however, this is not included in your word count. Your assignment should be presented using Times New Roman (TNR) 12 font, 1.5 line spacing, and it should be approximately 5,000 (+/- 10%) words in length. Your word count is from the introduction to conclusion sections.

 

You must endeavour to use theory explicitly at all stages, but do not spend time describing a theory. While you must be explicit about the theories, models, etc. that you use, you can assume that the reader is familiar with them. What the reader does want, is clear evidence of your ability to understand and critically apply the theory, in order to support the development of your findings and/or ideas in relation to testing your assignment aim.

You must cite all sources on which you have relied, for example textbooks, journal articles etc. using the Harvard Bibliographic Referencing System. Please be aware that if you do not cite all sources, then you may be accused of plagiarism, and that may endanger your success in passing the module. If you are in any doubt about how to reference your work, please obtain guidance from the library and/or your academic librarian(s) for this module.

 

Please do use illustrations, tables, etc. wherever these are helpful, and remember that these do not count towards your word limit. If you do use these, please do not put them in the appendices if they are part of your discussion. Appendices are the appropriate places to put supporting material, however, remember if the reader is satisfied with the main points of your discussion; the supporting information within the appendices may not even be reviewed.

 

 

  1. Core Texts 3 items
    1. Logistics management and strategy: competing through the supply chain– Harrison, Alan, Hoek, Remko I. van 2011 (book; ebook)

Book

  1. Logistics & supply chain management– Christopher, Martin 2011 (book; ebook)

Book

  1. Operations management– Slack, Nigel, Brandon-Jones, Alistair, Johnston, Robert 2013

Bookk

  1. Recommended Further Reading 9 items
    1. Operations management – Greasley, Andrew c2013

Book

  1. Operations and process management: principles and practice for strategic impact– Slack, Nigel 2012

Book

  1. Operations management: processes and supply chains– Heizer, Jay H., Render, Barry c2011

Book

  1. Operations management: an international perspective– Barnes, David c2008

Book

  1. Service operations management: improving service delivery – Johnston, Robert, Clark, Graham, Shulver, Michael 2012 (book; ebook)

Book

  1. Global logistics and supply chain management– Mangan, John, Lalwani, Chandra, Butcher, Tim, Javadpour, Roya 2012

Book

  1. Logistics operations and management: concepts and models– ZanjiraniFarahani, Reza, Kardar, Laleh,Rezapour, Shabnam 2011 (ebook)

Book

  1. The handbook of logistics & distribution management– Rushton, Alan, Croucher, Phil, Baker, Peter 2010(book; ebook)

Book

  1. Inbound logistics management: storage and supply of materials for the modern supply chain– Crocker, Barry, Jessop, D. A., Morrison, Alex 2011 (book; ebook)

Book

  1. Optional Further Reading 7 items
    1. Operations management– Paton, Steve c2011

Book

  1. Essential guide to operations management: concepts and case notes– Bamford, David R., Forrester, Paul L. c2010 (book; ebook)

Book

  1. Operations management– Jones, Peter, Robinson, Peter c2012

Book

  1. Service management: operations, strategy, information technology– Fitzsimmons, James A.,Fitzsimmons, Mona J., Bordoloi, Sanjeev 2014

Book

 

  1. Essential operations management– Hill, Alex, Hill, Terry 2011

Book

  1. Essentials of operations management– Young, Scott T. c2010

Book

  1. Supply chain logistics management – Bowersox, Donald J., Bowersox, John C., Closs, David J., Cooper, M. Bixby c2013

Book

 

Read More

This week, your task is to design an experiment for the Gas Permeation system. You must use your knowledge of chemical engineering and your resources to: 1. Perform a mass balance for one set of data. Calculate the molar flow rate for each component and the non-permeate and permeate streams. 2. Calculate flux, stage cut, percent recovery, and separation factor. Include relevant graphs for the permeate and non-permeate data (such as: total permeate flux versus stage cut, percent oxygen recovery versus operating pressure, separation factor versus stage cut, etc.) 3. Calculate the separation factors for each stage and for the two-, three-, and four-module system. Compare the counter-current data (stages 1 & 3) to the cocurrent data (stages 2 & 4). 4. Calculate the mole percent of oxygen and nitrogen in the feed stream and compare this with literature values for air.

This week, your task is to design an experiment for the Gas Permeation system. You must use your knowledge of chemical engineering and your resources to:
1.    Perform a mass balance for one set of data. Calculate the molar flow rate for each component and the non-permeate and permeate streams.
2.    Calculate flux, stage cut, percent recovery, and separation factor.  Include relevant graphs for the permeate and non-permeate data (such as: total permeate flux versus stage cut, percent oxygen recovery versus operating pressure, separation factor versus stage cut, etc.)
3.    Calculate the separation factors for each stage and for the two-, three-, and four-module system. Compare the counter-current data (stages 1 & 3) to the cocurrent data (stages 2 & 4).

4.    Calculate the mole percent of oxygen and nitrogen in the feed stream and compare this with literature values for air.

Read More

Name: Exam One Analysis Worksheet Use this worksheet to analyze the article provided to you for Exam One. You may type your answers directly into the boxes provided. (When you type your answers directly onto this worksheet the boxes will expand to fit your responses.) You will need to submit this worksheet along with your exam for credit. If you do not submit this worksheet, showing your work, you may receive a zero on the exam. Please submit this document directly to our “Week 6 – Exam 1 – Analysis Worksheet Submission Link” on TITANium. Good luck! 1.What is the issue? (Be sure you state the issue in the form of a question.) 2.What is the author’s conclusion? 3.List the reasons the author gives to support his/her conclusion. (Please put in a numbered or bullet-point format.) 4.Identify ambiguous and vague terms used in the author’s argument. 5.What are the value conflicts and the author’s value assumptions? 6.What are the descriptive assumptions?

Name:

Exam One Analysis Worksheet

Use this worksheet to analyze the article provided to you for Exam One. You may type your answers directly into the boxes provided. (When you type your answers directly onto this worksheet the boxes will expand to fit your responses.) You will need to submit this worksheet along with your exam for credit. If you do not submit this worksheet, showing your work, you may receive a zero on the exam. Please submit this document directly to our “Week 6 – Exam 1 – Analysis Worksheet Submission Link” on TITANium. Good luck!

  1. What is the issue? (Be sure you state the issue in the form of a question.)
 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What is the author’s conclusion?
 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. List the reasons the author gives to support his/her conclusion. (Please put in a numbered or bullet-point format.)
 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. Identify ambiguous and vague terms used in the author’s argument.
 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What are the value conflicts and the author’s value assumptions?
 

 

 

 

 

 

  1. What are the descriptive assumptions?
 

 

 

 

 

 

 

It’s a Job for Parents, Not the Government

Politicians say violent television creates violent kids.

I say regulation can’t take the place of Mom or Dad.

By John Romano

On an August day a few hundred TV makers like myself, from writer-producers to network chiefs, gathered in the grand ballroom of a Beverly Hills, Calif., hotel for the less-than-grand experience of being pelted with statistics. Led by the then Sen. Paul Simon, experts presented the yield of a dozen years of university studies, showing or seeming to show that watching violence on TV made kids violent. From Saturday-morning cartoons to prime-time dramas and the news, the number of violent incidents per week approached four digits. American kids reached high school having “witnessed” some 8,000 murders.

Naturally, we TV folk squirmed. We’d ask, “Can our programs actually make a nonviolent kid violent? Will you settle for “reinforce”?” They’d answer, “But why would you even want to reinforce violence in children?” Nice point. Or we’d say, “Where are the parents? Did they ever hear of flipping?” They’d shoot back, “What about latchkey kids, whose single parents have no choice but to use the TV as babysitter?”

But even on that day there were counter experts pointing out that the studies were at best controversial and at worst unscientific because they showed correlation instead of cause. Remember your philosophy professor with his old saw about how the rise of alcoholism between 1885 and 1900 correlated with the rise in the number of Baptist ministers? He’d let you founder for a while, then let you off the hook with the explanation: population rose between 1855 and 1900. But when the making of public policy is at stake, correlation masquerading as cause is not merely foolish; it’s dangerous. Suppose a correlation could be shown, for instance, between certain ethnic groups and violent or criminal behavior: should ethnicity be cited as cause, and targeted by Congress-or should deeper causes be looked for?

And as for the latchkey kid, some of the skeptics asked, aren’t there other circumstances in their lives that we should be worried about? Circumstances of neglect or poverty that might bring violence into their lives in ways other than TV? But on that August day, any questioning or criticism of the statistics went unanswered. The issue was our children’s safety and so even clear thinking seemed impious. By the time we collected our cars from valet parking, it was with a sense that we’d bought them with tainted money. Impressed by sessions such as this one, we in the industry imposed a rating system on ourselves in 1996, and the V-chip entered American life. Round One.

Enter 1999 and the 15 deaths at Littleton, Colorado, and an understandable sense of national urgency. The president summons to Washington, along with gun makers, the purveyors of violence on TV and in movies. He orders up a study on the effects of TV- only this one, many in the media fear, is attended by the real threat of government regulation when the foregone conclusion is reached: TV causes violent behavior in youth. It’s true that some social scientists continue to argue that the Littletons are not even the tip of the iceberg when measured against the vast majority of teenagers. But if such calm reasoning was uncomfortable before Littleton, it feels downright indecent now, when we can still remember seeing the bereaved friends and families on TV.

And yet public panic never comes without a cost. The more seriously we take the possible dangers of TV watching, and possible need for “tough” government intervention, the more important it is that we raise the IQ of the discussion. Of course there are pointlessly violent shows, not only available to children, but aimed at them. They are a regrettable pollution of our popular culture, even if they cause not a single act of violence.

But it is also true that counting up the number of undifferentiated “incidents” of violence on TV is misleading. It lumps together egregious uses of TV violence with its (dare I say it) positive uses – for instance, the disturbingly graphic moments of bloodshed that give force to the morally edifying dramas of “NYPD Blue” or “Homicide.”

The vigor of our nation’s creativity must be protected. No government can spare its citizens the job of being good parents. If you don’t want your kids watching, turn the darn thing off. Just as, if you don’t want them reading the Iliad because it’s violent or the Decameron because it’s gloriously, openly erotic, you would put the books on a high shelf they can’t reach. These days the public, goaded on by politicians, seems like it’s warming up for a book burning, and the idea of holding a book burning in the halls of Congress is truly violent and obscene. And it is the most un-American thing anybody has thought of in a long time.

 

Romano is co-executive producer of “Third Watch,” on NBC, and co-writer of the motion picture “The Third Miracle.”

 

Read More

1.The entry to record selling 300 shares of no-par common stock with a stated value of $60 for $70 would be to __________. A. debit Cash $21,000; credit Common Stock $21,000 B. debit Cash $18,000; credit Common Stock $18,000 C. debit Cash $21,000; credit Common Stock $18,000; debit Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value-Common $3,000 2.The entry to record MidIowa.net selling 800 shares of $6.00 par value common stock at $8.00 would be to __________. A. debit Cash $6,400; credit Common Stock $4,800; credit Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value-Common $1,600 B. debit Cash $4,800; credit Common Stock $4,800 C. debit Cash $6,400; debit Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value-Common $1,600; credit Common Stock $8,000 D. none of the above 3.The major parts of the Stockholders’ Equity section of the balance sheet are __________. A. Paid-in Capital and Retained Earnings B. Stock and Retained Earnings C. Stock, Paid-in Capital, and Retained Earnings D. Authorized Stock and Preferred Stock 4.Rhubarb Corporation’s outstanding stock is 100 shares of $100, 11% cumulative nonparticipating preferred stock, and 2,000 shares of $12 par value common stock. Rhubarb paid $1,600 cash dividends during the year. Common stockholders received __________. A. $0 B. $500 C. $2,500 D.$1100.00 5.Soy.com has 100 shares of $100, 6% cumulative nonparticipating preferred stock, and 1,000 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding. The company paid $2,000 cash dividends including one-year dividends in arrears to preferred stockholders. Preferred stockholders received __________. A. $1,200 B. $2,000 C. $182 D. $600 Dolly’s Best issued 200 shares of its $10 common stock in exchange for used packaging equipment with a fair market value of $2,400. The entry to record the acquisition of the equipment would include a __________. A. debit to Equipment for $2,000 B. debit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par for $400 C. credit to Common Stock for $2,400 D. DEBIT TO EQUIPMENT FOR 2400 Custer.com’s outstanding stock is 100 shares of $100, 6% cumulative nonparticipating preferred stock, and 1,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. Custer paid $2,000 cash dividends including one-year dividends in arrears to preferred stockholders. Common stockholders received __________. A. $0 B. $800 C. $1,818 If only one type of stock is issued, it is __________. A. no-par preferred stock B. preferred stock C. legal capital D. common stock D. $600 D. debit to Equipment for $2,400

1.The entry to record selling 300 shares of no-par common stock with a stated value of $60 for $70 would be to __________. A. debit Cash $21,000; credit Common Stock $21,000 B. debit Cash $18,000; credit Common Stock $18,000 C. debit Cash $21,000; credit Common Stock $18,000; debit Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value-Common $3,000 2.The entry to record MidIowa.net selling 800 shares of $6.00 par value common stock at $8.00 would be to __________. A. debit Cash $6,400; credit Common Stock $4,800; credit Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value-Common $1,600 B. debit Cash $4,800; credit Common Stock $4,800 C. debit Cash $6,400; debit Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par Value-Common $1,600; credit Common Stock $8,000 D. none of the above 3.The major parts of the Stockholders’ Equity section of the balance sheet are __________. A. Paid-in Capital and Retained Earnings B. Stock and Retained Earnings C. Stock, Paid-in Capital, and Retained Earnings D. Authorized Stock and Preferred Stock 4.Rhubarb Corporation’s outstanding stock is 100 shares of $100, 11% cumulative nonparticipating preferred stock, and 2,000 shares of $12 par value common stock. Rhubarb paid $1,600 cash dividends during the year. Common stockholders received __________. A. $0 B. $500 C. $2,500 D.$1100.00 5.Soy.com has 100 shares of $100, 6% cumulative nonparticipating preferred stock, and 1,000 shares of $10 par value common stock outstanding. The company paid $2,000 cash dividends including one-year dividends in arrears to preferred stockholders. Preferred stockholders received __________. A. $1,200 B. $2,000 C. $182 D. $600 Dolly’s Best issued 200 shares of its $10 common stock in exchange for used packaging equipment with a fair market value of $2,400. The entry to record the acquisition of the equipment would include a __________. A. debit to Equipment for $2,000 B. debit to Paid-in Capital in Excess of Par for $400 C. credit to Common Stock for $2,400 D. DEBIT TO EQUIPMENT FOR 2400 Custer.com’s outstanding stock is 100 shares of $100, 6% cumulative nonparticipating preferred stock, and 1,000 shares of $10 par value common stock. Custer paid $2,000 cash dividends including one-year dividends in arrears to preferred stockholders. Common stockholders received __________. A. $0 B. $800 C. $1,818 If only one type of stock is issued, it is __________. A. no-par preferred stock B. preferred stock C. legal capital D. common stock D. $600 D. debit to Equipment for $2,400

Read More

Describe how white privilege is explained in the article “Unpacking the Backpack of White Privilege.” What forms of institutionalized discrimination are seen in the film Little Rock Central, 50 Years Later? you can watch the film here http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uvgvRChtkbA , http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=go4NBHbjM4k

Describe how white privilege is explained in the article “Unpacking the Backpack of White Privilege.” What forms of institutionalized discrimination are seen in the film Little Rock Central, 50 Years Later? you can watch the film here http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=uvgvRChtkbA , http://www.youtube.com/watch?v=go4NBHbjM4k

Read More

Reading Test [Pin It] To prepare for the exam, you should use the practice article provided in the Week 6 section. The article is titled, “It’s a Job for Parents, Not the Government.” I recommend that you read the article and view the presentation to get an overview of what will be expected of you on the exam. You will be analyzing the argument presented in the article by answering the critical questions we have been studying. The Analysis Worksheet will provide a good model for you to follow as you critically read each paragraph. If you find you are having difficulty with a particular critical question, go back to that chapter in the ARQ text and review the information. There are also practice exercises at the end of each chapter that can be helpful. Once you have completed your analysis, you will be required to apply your understanding of the author’s argument to answer a series of multiple choice questions. Be sure to submit your answers to the exam questions as well as your analysis worksheet. If you do not submit your worksheet, you will not get credit for the exam. You will be taking the exam on Friday. You will have 2 hours to complete the exam. The exam must be completed in one sitting. You may not start the exam in the morning and then go back to it later in the day. Be sure that you have ample time to complete the test before you begin.

Reading Test

To prepare for the exam, you should use the practice article provided in the Week 6 section.  The article is titled, “It’s a Job for Parents, Not the Government.”  I recommend that you read the article and view the presentation to get an overview of what will be expected of you on the exam.  You will be analyzing the argument presented in the article by answering the critical questions we have been studying.  The Analysis Worksheet will provide a good model for you to follow as you critically read each paragraph.   If you find you are having difficulty with a particular critical question, go back to that chapter in the ARQ text and review the information.  There are also practice exercises at the end of each chapter that can be helpful.  Once you have completed your analysis, you will be required to apply your understanding of the author’s argument to answer a series of multiple choice questions.  Be sure to submit your answers to the exam questions as well as your analysis worksheet.  If you do not submit your worksheet, you will not get credit for the exam.

You will be taking the exam on Friday. You will have 2 hours to complete the exam.  The exam must be completed in one sitting.  You may not start the exam in the morning and then go back to it later in the day.  Be sure that you have ample time to complete the test before you begin.

Read More

Primary Task Response: Within the Discussion Board area, write 400–600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. (I have attached the Target organization sheet that need to be filled and complete). Knowing why you want to enter into the field you have chosen or advance within your current career is important. It is equally important that you have a thorough understanding of the organizations and job opportunities within your target field. Research is the key to a successful job search, and it will be of great benefit to you as you target specific organizations and fields. For this assignment, complete the following: Create a list of 10 organizations and their Web sites that fit within your target job market (1 of which can be your current organization) *note that my target job market is to become a Police Office. Input them into your Target Organization Template List. As you conduct your research, consider the potential that each organization offers. Next, choose 3 organizations to focus on, and compile detailed information about those 3 organizations in the Target Organization Template List. Upload the list as an attached document to the Discussion Board area. Within the Discussion Board area, share the following information with your classmates for the 3 organizations you researched. (For those of you who want to advance within your current organization, this is an excellent opportunity to think through where you may want to grow within your organization or field.) The name of the organization. The mission of the organization. Career options within the organization. Three aspects of the organization that align with your goals.

Primary Task Response: Within the Discussion Board area, write 400–600 words that respond to the following questions with your thoughts, ideas, and comments. (I have attached the Target organization sheet that need to be filled and complete).

 

Knowing why you want to enter into the field you have chosen or advance within your current career is important. It is equally important that you have a thorough understanding of the organizations and job opportunities within your target field. Research is the key to a successful job search, and it will be of great benefit to you as you target specific organizations and fields. For this assignment, complete the following:

  1. Create a list of 10 organizations and their Web sites that fit within your target job market (1 of which can be your current organization) *note that my target job market is to become a Police Office. Input them into your Target Organization Template List. As you conduct your research, consider the potential that each organization offers.
  2. Next, choose 3 organizations to focus on, and compile detailed information about those 3 organizations in the Target Organization Template List.
  3. Upload the list as an attached document to the Discussion Board area.
  4. Within the Discussion Board area, share the following information with your classmates for the 3 organizations you researched. (For those of you who want to advance within your current organization, this is an excellent opportunity to think through where you may want to grow within your organization or field.)
    • The name of the organization.
    • The mission of the organization.
    • Career options within the organization.
    • Three aspects of the organization that align with your goals.

Read More

Assignment 1: Monitoring Our Home Planet The Internet is a powerful tool that provides the ability to monitor natural phenomena and disasters that happen all over planet Earth. In this assignment, you will research resources available on the Internet for monitoring natural phenomena including earthquakes, volcanoes, tsunamis, global climate, and weather. Based on your research, do the following: Identify a minimum of three different natural phenomena that are typically responsible for natural disasters. Analyze the potential impact of these disasters. Analyze how these phenomenon are monitored, or not, via the Internet. Critique available Web sites, which publicly display up-to-date monitored information related to each of the natural phenomena you have identified. Focus on the following aspects: Geography What parts of the world are potentially affected by these phenomena? Specifically identify the countries. Resources What kinds of resources are allocated toward monitoring these phenomena and why? What types of Web resources monitor the phenomena and provide up-to-date information about them? What kinds of technology are involved in monitoring the phenomena? Politics What political ramifications would this disaster-preparedness technology cause between more-developed countries and less-developed countries? What kinds of issues could this technology cause between less-developed countries? Economics How would this technology directly impact the economies of those countries that have the technology versus those countries that do not? Do you predict any indirect impacts? What current evidence supports your position? Disaster Preparedness What types of systems are in place in terms of disaster preparedness related to these monitored phenomena? Summarize your findings. Evaluate how this technology will impact the future of humanity, both positively and negatively. Be sure to consider the political and economic issues discussed in your future predictions. Support your statements with examples. Use a minimum of six reliable references, two of which should be peer-reviewed articles. Write a 7–8-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M5_A1.doc. By Saturday, March 8, 2014, deliver your assignment to the M5: Assignment 1 Dropbox.

Assignment 1: Monitoring Our Home Planet

The Internet is a powerful tool that provides the ability to monitor natural phenomena and disasters that happen all over planet Earth.

In this assignment, you will research resources available on the Internet for monitoring natural phenomena including earthquakes, volcanoes, tsunamis, global climate, and weather.

Based on your research, do the following:

  • Identify a minimum of three different natural phenomena that are typically responsible for natural disasters. Analyze the potential impact of these disasters.
  • Analyze how these phenomenon are monitored, or not, via the Internet. Critique available Web sites, which publicly display up-to-date monitored information related to each of the natural phenomena you have identified. Focus on the following aspects:
    • Geography
      • What parts of the world are potentially affected by these phenomena? Specifically identify the countries.
    • Resources
      • What kinds of resources are allocated toward monitoring these phenomena and why?
      • What types of Web resources monitor the phenomena and provide up-to-date information about them?
      • What kinds of technology are involved in monitoring the phenomena?
    • Politics
      • What political ramifications would this disaster-preparedness technology cause between more-developed countries and less-developed countries?
      • What kinds of issues could this technology cause between less-developed countries?
    • Economics
      • How would this technology directly impact the economies of those countries that have the technology versus those countries that do not?
      • Do you predict any indirect impacts? What current evidence supports your position?
    • Disaster Preparedness
      • What types of systems are in place in terms of disaster preparedness related to these monitored phenomena?
  • Summarize your findings. Evaluate how this technology will impact the future of humanity, both positively and negatively. Be sure to consider the political and economic issues discussed in your future predictions.

Support your statements with examples. Use a minimum of six reliable references, two of which should be peer-reviewed articles.

Write a 7–8-page paper in Word format. Apply APA standards to citation of sources. Use the following file naming convention: LastnameFirstInitial_M5_A1.doc.

By Saturday, March 8, 2014, deliver your assignment to the M5: Assignment 1 Dropbox.

Grading Criteria and Rubric

Assignment 1 Grading Criteria
Maximum Points
Identify a minimum of three different naturally occurring phenomena that are typically responsible for natural disasters and analyze the potential impact of the disaster.
104
Analyze ways different Web sites monitor phenomena by critiquing available Web resources. Analysis should include topics such as geography, resources, political/economic issues, and disaster preparedness.
104
Summarize and discuss future projections on humanity regarding the use of technology. Include research on political and economic issues.
28
Writing Components:

Organization (16)

Usage and Mechanics (16)

APA Elements (24)

Style (8)

64

Read More

Economics Very easy if you read through the questio Here is our next question. Assignment 2: Market Forms For this assignment you will do a significant portion of work in MS Excel and import it into an MS Word document for submission. You will use the data below to address Price and Output decisions faced by firms that are not in pure competition. Some numbers may be rounded. Table 1 Output Average Fixed cost Average Variable Cost Average Total Cost Marginal Cost Price Total Revenue Marginal Revenue 0 $ 345.00 1 $ 180.00 $ 135.00 $ 315.00 $ 300.00 2 $ 90.00 $ 127.50 $ 217.50 $ 249.00 3 $ 60.00 $ 120.00 $ 180.00 $ 213.00 4 $ 45.00 $ 112.50 $ 157.50 $ 189.00 5 $ 36.00 $ 111.00 $ 147.00 $ 165.00 6 $ 30.00 $ 112.50 $ 142.50 $ 144.00 7 $ 25.71 $ 115.70 $ 141.41 $ 126.00 8 $ 22.50 $ 121.90 $ 144.40 $ 111.00 9 $ 20.00 $ 130.00 $ 150.00 $ 99.00 10 $ 18.00 $ 139.50 $ 157.50 $ 87.00 Address the following: Complete Table-1. Summarize your calculations. Prepare a chart showing: Average Fixed Costs Average Variable Costs Average Total Costs Marginal Revenue Marginal Costs Using the data in the table and on your graph, explain the profit maximizing, or loss minimizing level of output. Define a normal profit and an economic profit. Are normal profits being earned in this example? Are economic profits present for this firm in this example? Explain your answers. Given the data in the table and the graph, what type of market structure could this be in the short run? Explain your answers. If the data in Table-1 represents the long run, what type of firm must this data represent? Explain your answers. . Quotations, paraphrases, and ideas you get from books, articles, or other sources of information should be cited using APA style. Help with citing sources can be found through the Academic Resources page under Course Home.

Economics Very easy if you read through the questio

Here is our next question.

Assignment 2: Market Forms

For this assignment you will do a significant portion of work in MS Excel and import it into an MS Word document for submission. You will use the data below to address Price and Output decisions faced by firms that are not in pure competition. Some numbers may be rounded.

 

 

Table 1

             
Output Average Fixed cost Average Variable Cost Average Total Cost Marginal Cost  Price Total Revenue  Marginal Revenue
0          $ 345.00    
1  $   180.00  $ 135.00  $    315.00    $ 300.00    
2  $     90.00  $ 127.50  $    217.50    $ 249.00    
3  $     60.00  $ 120.00  $    180.00    $ 213.00    
4  $     45.00  $ 112.50  $    157.50    $ 189.00    
5  $     36.00  $ 111.00  $    147.00    $ 165.00    
6  $     30.00  $ 112.50  $    142.50    $ 144.00    
7  $     25.71  $ 115.70  $    141.41    $ 126.00    
8  $     22.50  $ 121.90  $    144.40    $ 111.00    
9  $     20.00  $ 130.00  $    150.00    $   99.00    
10  $     18.00  $ 139.50  $    157.50    $   87.00    

Address the following:

  1. Complete Table-1. Summarize your calculations.
  2. Prepare a chart showing:
    • Average Fixed Costs
    • Average Variable Costs
    • Average Total Costs
    • Marginal Revenue
    • Marginal Costs
  3. Using the data in the table and on your graph, explain the profit maximizing, or loss minimizing level of output.
  4. Define a normal profit and an economic profit. Are normal profits being earned in this example? Are economic profits present for this firm in this example?  Explain your answers.
  5. Given the data in the table and the graph, what type of market structure could this be in the short run? Explain your answers.
  6. If the data in Table-1 represents the long run, what type of firm must this data represent? Explain your answers.

.

Quotations, paraphrases, and ideas you get from books, articles, or other sources of information should be cited using APA style. Help with citing sources can be found through the Academic Resources page under Course Home.

Read More

1 page, due in 8 hrs or so, APA, 1 source University X considered al of the options for wireless networking- 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g- before deciding on an 802.11a solution. The 802. 11a option won out because it provides greater bandwidth in two ways; more bandwidth per access point and closer grouping of access points, so fewer students share a given chunk of bandwidth 802.11a provides smaller cells with more access points in a given area, which, which effectively divides access, roughly by classroom, and there is less overlap. Also, 802.11a enables greater number of channels as compared to 802.11b. According to the analysts for university X, 802.11g had one key deficit: it carries the inherent disadvantages of 802.11b with respect to the number of non-overlapping channels. 1. Why did University X select the 802.11 option? 2. Can you think of a scenario where 802.11b will be preferred over 802.11a?

1 page, due in 8 hrs or so, APA, 1 source

 

University X considered al of the options for wireless networking- 802.11a, 802.11b and 802.11g- before deciding on an 802.11a solution. The 802. 11a option won out because it provides greater bandwidth in two ways; more bandwidth per access point and closer grouping of access points, so fewer students share a given chunk of bandwidth 802.11a provides smaller cells with more access points in a given area, which, which effectively divides access, roughly by classroom, and there is less overlap. Also, 802.11a enables greater number of channels as compared to 802.11b. According to the analysts for university X, 802.11g had one key deficit: it carries the inherent disadvantages of 802.11b with respect to the number of non-overlapping channels.

1. Why did University X select the 802.11 option?

2. Can you think of a scenario where 802.11b will be preferred over 802.11a?

Read More

Case Application 3: TEAM FUN! Tony, the new director of human resources, and Edna, the compensation and benefits manager, are hanging employment legislation posters in RETREAT, the TEAM FUN! employee cafeteria. Edna offers, “I remember some woman who applied for a job to advertise men’s baseball gear and sued when she didn’t get the job. The EEOC said she had no case. A couple of years ago, we moved Fred from fitness demos to stock management because he couldn’t do the treadmill or lift the big weights anymore. There was talk about an age discrimination case because he was 57, but that never went anywhere.” Tony asks, “Do you realize that all of the warehouse workers are male and all the RETREAT workers are female?” Edna replies, “What’s your point?” Tony waves his hand at the EEOC information they have displayed. Edna shrugs, “This is the best job I ever had. If you ask anyone else who works here, they will say the same thing.” Questions: 1. What is the probable defense for the baseball gear job (BFOQ, 4/5ths rule, glass ceiling)? Explain. 2. Why didn’t Fred’s age discrimination case go anywhere? 3. Is TEAM FUN! open to discrimination charges in other areas? 4. What should be done to protect TEAM FUN! from discrimination charges?

Case Application 3: TEAM FUN!

 

Tony, the new director of human resources, and Edna, the compensation and benefits manager, are hanging employment legislation posters in RETREAT, the TEAM FUN! employee cafeteria. Edna offers, “I remember some woman who applied for a job to advertise men’s baseball gear and sued when she didn’t get the job. The EEOC said she had no case. A couple of years ago, we moved Fred from fitness demos to stock management because he couldn’t do the treadmill or lift the big weights anymore. There was talk about an age discrimination case because he was 57, but that never went anywhere.”

Tony asks, “Do you realize that all of the warehouse workers are male and all the RETREAT workers are female?”

Edna replies, “What’s your point?” Tony waves his hand at the EEOC information they have displayed. Edna shrugs, “This is the best job I ever had. If you ask anyone else who works here, they will say the same thing.”

 

Questions:

1. What is the probable defense for the baseball gear job (BFOQ, 4/5ths rule, glass ceiling)? Explain.

2. Why didn’t Fred’s age discrimination case go anywhere?

3. Is TEAM FUN! open to discrimination charges in other areas?

4. What should be done to protect TEAM FUN! from discrimination charges?

Read More

Marketing [Pin It] 1.What criteria will you use to distinguish ethical advertising from unethical advertising? 2. Many large firms are investing in Behavioral Targeting i.e., tracking online activities of the target customer (the pages or sites users’ visit, the content they view, the search queries they enter, the ads they click on, the information they share on social internet sites) and combining it with the time, length, and frequency of visits. Do you think Behavioral Targeting (BT) is ethical and conforms to market research standards? How can companies gather customer data without infringing individual rights to privacy? And, 1. Discuss a U.S. corporation that practices a global marketing approach. In which country/region does it operate and what market entry strategy does it employ? Why do you think it chose this particular strategy? 2. For the same corporation, suggest another market entry strategy for a different country/region. Justify your suggestion. 3. Do you think the country-of-origin effect works in this case? Why or why not?

Marketing

1.What criteria will you use to distinguish ethical advertising from unethical advertising?

2. Many large firms are investing in Behavioral Targeting i.e., tracking online activities of the target customer (the pages or sites users’ visit, the content they view, the search queries they enter, the ads they click on, the information they share on social internet sites) and combining it with the time, length, and frequency of visits. Do you think Behavioral Targeting (BT) is ethical and conforms to market research standards? How can companies gather customer data without infringing individual rights to privacy?

And,

  1. Discuss a U.S. corporation that practices a global marketing approach. In which country/region does it operate and what market entry strategy does it employ?  Why do you think it chose this particular strategy?
  2. For the same corporation, suggest another market entry strategy for a different country/region. Justify your suggestion.
  3. Do you think the country-of-origin effect works in this case? Why or why not?

Read More

Discussion 1 Leadership and Management in Health Care Compare and contrast leadership roles and management responsibilities in a non-health care setting with that of a health care organization. In addition, present an overview of key leadership traits fundamental for health care organizational effectiveness, and discuss the essential functions of health care managers. Provide a substantive 150 to 250 word initial post that fully answers the following questions: What does it take to be a “good” leader or manager? What are the primary barriers and challenges associated with health care leadership? Dicussion 2 Management and Motivation Discuss the overall importance of motivation as it relates to management. Provide a substantive 150 to 250 word initial post that fully answers the following questions: What are the benefits of having a fully motivated staff, and what are the potential consequences of not having motivated staff? What do contemporary theories tell us about the significance of motivation as a function of employee needs, extrinsic and intrinsic factors? How do we motivate across generations? In your response, please be sure to identify and address at least two theories. Utilize at least one scholarly source, cited in correct APA format that supports factual statements and conclusions about the topic. Review several of your classmates’ posts. Provide a substantive response to at least two of your peers by Day 7.

Discussion 1
Leadership and Management in Health Care

Compare and contrast leadership roles and management responsibilities in a non-health care setting with that of a health care organization.  In addition, present an overview of key leadership traits fundamental for health care organizational effectiveness, and discuss the essential functions of health care managers. Provide a substantive 150 to 250 word initial post that fully answers the following questions:

  • What does it take to be a “good” leader or manager?
  • What are the primary barriers and challenges associated with health care leadership?

Dicussion 2

Management and Motivation

Discuss the overall importance of motivation as it relates to management. Provide a substantive 150 to 250 word initial post that fully answers the following questions:

  • What are the benefits of having a fully motivated staff, and what are the potential consequences of not having motivated staff?
  • What do contemporary theories tell us about the significance of motivation as a function of employee needs, extrinsic and intrinsic factors?
  • How do we motivate across generations? In your response, please be sure to identify and address at least two theories.

Utilize at least one scholarly source, cited in correct APA format that supports factual statements and conclusions about the topic. Review several of your classmates’ posts. Provide a substantive response to at least two of your peers by Day 7.

Read More

Number of Pages: 7 (Double Spaced) Writing Style: APA Number of sources: 7 1.Analyze the leadership style(s) of a senior executive (CEO, CFO, COO, Director, etc.) in your current or previous organization who made a positive or negative impact on you. 2.Analyze the organizational structure and culture of the company for which you work (or would like to work) to determine its approach to team development, and whether that approach helped to enhance your relationship skills in the workplace. 3.Evaluate the performance of your selected leader based on his or her ethical conduct and effective communication to determine if this leader was successful in motivating and empowering you to improve on your work performance. Explain your answer. 4.Determine three (3) best practices organizational leaders can use to motivate employees and discuss their potential benefits. 5.Discuss some of the challenges leaders encounter when managing diversity and how diversity helps business organizations better compete in global markets. 6.Develop an effective business strategy to address the challenges and issues you have identified above. 7.Use at least five (5) quality references. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not qualify as academic resources

Number of Pages: 7 (Double Spaced)

Writing Style: APA

Number of sources: 7

  1. Analyze the leadership style(s) of a senior executive (CEO, CFO, COO, Director, etc.) in your current or previous organization who made a positive or negative impact on you.
  2. Analyze the organizational structure and culture of the company for which you work (or would like to work) to determine its approach to team development, and whether that approach helped to enhance your relationship skills in the workplace.
  3. Evaluate the performance of your selected leader based on his or her ethical conduct and effective communication to determine if this leader was successful in motivating and empowering you to improve on your work performance. Explain your answer.
  4. Determine three (3) best practices organizational leaders can use to motivate employees and discuss their potential benefits.
  5. Discuss some of the challenges leaders encounter when managing diversity and how diversity helps business organizations better compete in global markets.
  6. Develop an effective business strategy to address the challenges and issues you have identified above.
  7. Use at least five (5) quality references. Note: Wikipedia and other Websites do not qualify as academic resources

 

 

Read More

Reading Test [Pin It] To prepare for the exam, you should use the practice article provided in the Week 6 section. The article is titled, “It’s a Job for Parents, Not the Government.” I recommend that you read the article and view the presentation to get an overview of what will be expected of you on the exam. You will be analyzing the argument presented in the article by answering the critical questions we have been studying. The Analysis Worksheet will provide a good model for you to follow as you critically read each paragraph. If you find you are having difficulty with a particular critical question, go back to that chapter in the ARQ text and review the information. There are also practice exercises at the end of each chapter that can be helpful. Once you have completed your analysis, you will be required to apply your understanding of the author’s argument to answer a series of multiple choice questions. Be sure to submit your answers to the exam questions as well as your analysis worksheet. If you do not submit your worksheet, you will not get credit for the exam. You will be taking the exam on Friday. You will have 2 hours to complete the exam. The exam must be completed in one sitting. You may not start the exam in the morning and then go back to it later in the day. Be sure that you have ample time to complete the test before you begin.

Reading Test

To prepare for the exam, you should use the practice article provided in the Week 6 section.  The article is titled, “It’s a Job for Parents, Not the Government.”  I recommend that you read the article and view the presentation to get an overview of what will be expected of you on the exam.  You will be analyzing the argument presented in the article by answering the critical questions we have been studying.  The Analysis Worksheet will provide a good model for you to follow as you critically read each paragraph.   If you find you are having difficulty with a particular critical question, go back to that chapter in the ARQ text and review the information.  There are also practice exercises at the end of each chapter that can be helpful.  Once you have completed your analysis, you will be required to apply your understanding of the author’s argument to answer a series of multiple choice questions.  Be sure to submit your answers to the exam questions as well as your analysis worksheet.  If you do not submit your worksheet, you will not get credit for the exam.

You will be taking the exam on Friday. You will have 2 hours to complete the exam.  The exam must be completed in one sitting.  You may not start the exam in the morning and then go back to it later in the day.  Be sure that you have ample time to complete the test before you begin.

Read More

1.HIPAA Article : All students will choose, from a list of HIPAA related topics, a specific HIPAA topic to research and write a professional “informative” article with at least two citations in APA style. The quality of this paper should reflect the quality of articles that one would read in a health care magazine. (Again, Wikipedia is not an academically appropriate source.) are required to write 2-3 pages. Written Document Requirements for the HIPAA Article: 1.Material should be well thought out, well-organized, and professionally presented. 2.Documents should be double-spaced, with one-inch margins and 12 point font size. 3.Grammar, word usage, sentence structure, punctuation, and spelling should be correct. Anything taken verbatim from the work of someone else must be quoted and referenced. The use of someone else’s ideas must also be referenced. This includes material from journals, textbooks, and the internet. References should include proper in-text citations, followed by a proper reference page at the end of the paper.

  1. HIPAA Article : All students will choose, from a list of HIPAA related topics, a specific HIPAA topic to research and write a professional “informative” article with at least two citations in APA style. The quality of this paper should reflect the quality of articles that one would read in a health care magazine. (Again, Wikipedia is not an academically appropriate source.)

 

are required to write 2-3 pages.

 

 

 

Written Document Requirements for the HIPAA Article:

  1. Material should be well thought out, well-organized, and professionally presented.
  2. Documents should be double-spaced, with one-inch margins and 12 point font size.
  3. Grammar, word usage, sentence structure, punctuation, and spelling should be correct.

 

Anything taken verbatim from the work of someone else must be quoted and referenced. The use of someone else’s ideas must also be referenced. This includes material from journals, textbooks, and the internet. References should include proper in-text citations, followed by a proper reference page at the end of the paper.

 

 

Read More

How politics changed literature in the nineteenth century? Write an argumentative essay expressing your point of view. Support your ideas with proper citations. Make sure the introduction and conclusion are though-provoking and ideas are presented in a logical manner. Mention 3-5 sources in the list of references. Include in-text citations in your essay.

Write an argumentative essay expressing your point of view. Support your ideas with proper citations. Make sure the introduction and conclusion are though-provoking and ideas are presented in a logical manner.
Mention 3-5 sources in the list of references. Include in-text citations in your essay.

Read More

I need a 40-45 pages literature review. I have the entire outline and some examples of literature review. I need at least 50 references (not include in 40 pages). The topic is in quality engineering field. 10 days max to submit the work and you have to update me every 2-3 days, so I can correct you for anything. Please give me your final price because I want to compare yours with other. Very important that the level of writing is a PhD level (high academic level) otherwise the whole work will be rejected and full refund will be issue.

I need a 40-45 pages literature review. I have the entire outline and some examples of literature review. I need at least 50 references (not include in 40 pages). The topic is in quality engineering field. 10 days max to submit the work and you have to update me every 2-3 days, so I can correct you for anything. Please give me your final price because I want to compare yours with other.

Very important that the level of writing is a PhD level (high academic level) otherwise the whole work will be rejected and full refund will be issue.

Read More

PLEASE READ AND ANSWER CAREFULLY!! 1. What challenges, if any, did you face in your decision to study or intern abroad? How did you meet these challenges and what impact do you foresee them having on your experience abroad? These could include, but are not limited to, being a parent, being a non-traditional student, having a learning or physical disability, being in a field of study for which it is difficult to incorporate study abroad, etc. **YOU MAY ANSWER AND EXPAND IN YOUR OWN WAY. HOWEVER I WOULD LIKE TO ALSO MENTION FINANCIAL PROBLEM AS ONE OF THE BARRIERS (CHALLENGES) THAT EFFECT MY DECISION OF STUDY ABROAD** Should you be selected to receive a Gilman Scholarship, you will be required to carry out a Follow-on Service Project upon your return to the U.S. which promotes the Gilman Program and international education on your home campus and/or in your community. All applicants will be required to write a proposal explaining how you will give back by inspiring others to pursue their own experiences abroad. Projects should maximize the impact of your experience abroad by extending the benefits you received to your campus and community. Projects should be clear, able to be completed in approximately one semester, and have obtainable goals. Examples of Follow-on Service Projects are attached. You should carefully review your essay and proofread your essay for spelling, grammar and content prior to submission. Summarize your Follow-on Service Project Proposal in paragraph format by addressing the following questions. 1. Briefly outline your proposed project to promote the Gilman Scholarship and international education. How will this project impact your home university or home community? What are your project goals? 2. What is your target population and how will your project impact this group? 3. How will you integrate the impact of your experiences abroad into your project? 4. What, if any, campus departments, student organizations, and/or community organizations will you collaborate with in promoting the Gilman Scholarship and international education? Have you already made contact with these groups?

PLEASE READ AND ANSWER CAREFULLY!!

1. What challenges, if any, did you face in your decision to study or intern abroad? How did you meet these challenges and what impact do you foresee them having on your experience abroad? These could include, but are not limited to, being a parent, being a non-traditional student, having a learning or physical disability, being in a field of study for which it is difficult to incorporate study abroad, etc.

**YOU MAY ANSWER AND EXPAND IN YOUR OWN WAY. HOWEVER I WOULD LIKE TO ALSO MENTION FINANCIAL PROBLEM AS ONE OF THE BARRIERS (CHALLENGES) THAT EFFECT MY DECISION OF STUDY ABROAD**

Should you be selected to receive a Gilman Scholarship, you will be required to carry out a Follow-on Service Project upon your return to the U.S. which promotes the Gilman Program and international education on your home campus and/or in your community.  All applicants will be required to write a proposal explaining how you will give back by inspiring others to pursue their own experiences abroad. Projects should maximize the impact of your experience abroad by extending the benefits you received to your campus and community. Projects should be clear, able to be completed in approximately one semester, and have obtainable goals. Examples of Follow-on Service Projects are attached. You should carefully review your essay and proofread your essay for spelling, grammar and content prior to submission. Summarize your Follow-on Service Project Proposal in paragraph format by addressing the following questions.

1. Briefly outline your proposed project to promote the Gilman Scholarship and international education. How will this project impact your home university or home community? What are your project goals?
2. What is your target population and how will your project impact this group?
3. How will you integrate the impact of your experiences abroad into your project?
4. What, if any, campus departments, student organizations, and/or community organizations will you collaborate with in promoting the Gilman Scholarship and international education? Have you already made contact with these groups?

Read More

Begin working on your Portfolio Project by researching and selecting an article for your analysis. Appropriate articles are those that: • Are no older than six months old • Contain at least three general economic principles • Contain at least three to five macroeconomic indices. Submit an outline that provides information on your article and the three general economic principles and the three to five macroeconomic indices you will be discussing in your Project. For the Portfolio Project, students will conduct an analysis of a recent article and provide their evaluation and outcome expectations in a written paper of 1500-2500 words that discusses: • A minimum of three general economic principles related to the article • Identification of three to five macroeconomic indices • Definition and explanation of the indices e.g., GDP, CPI, and other economic calculations • Definition and explanation of the indices • Discussion about what the specific indices mean in relationship to the overall article and how they impact each other • Appropriate evaluation, decisions and forecasts that could be made from the information.

Begin working on your Portfolio Project by researching and selecting an article for your analysis. Appropriate articles are those that:
• Are no older than six months old
• Contain at least three general economic principles
• Contain at least three to five macroeconomic indices.
Submit an outline that provides information on your article and the three general economic principles and the three to five macroeconomic indices you will be discussing in your Project.

For the Portfolio Project, students will conduct an analysis of a recent article and provide their evaluation and outcome expectations in a written paper of 1500-2500 words that discusses:
• A minimum of three general economic principles related to the article
• Identification of three to five macroeconomic indices
• Definition and explanation of the indices e.g., GDP, CPI, and other economic calculations
• Definition and explanation of the indices
• Discussion about what the specific indices mean in relationship to the overall article and how they impact each other
• Appropriate evaluation, decisions and forecasts that could be made from the information.

Read More

(TCO 1) Which of the following is true about fixed-income securities? (Points : 6) A. They are usually found on the income statement. B. They are always found on the left side of the balance sheet. C. They are usually shown on the right side of the balance sheet. D. None of the above 2. (TCO 2) The concept of risk versus return _______. (Points : 6) A. dictates that higher risk investments should earn a higher return B. dictates that risk and return usually have a covariance of -1 C. shows that risk-loving investors always want to earn double the return of risk-averse investors D. None of the above 3. (TCO 5) Which of the following is true? (Points : 6) A. YTM is the same as a bond’s coupon yield in all cases. B. YTM reflects the total return to a bondholder, taking time value of money into account. C. Yield to call is of interest to companies issuing redeemable bonds only. D. None of the above 4. (TCO 9) Financial leverage is _______. (Points : 6) A. always a good thing B. a good thing when sales are falling C. a good thing when sales are rising D. None of the above 5. (TOC 9) A firm’s WACC refers to what? (Points : 6) A. Relevance to the capital budgeting process called simple payback B. The cost of capital used for NPV calculations C. The maximum amount of return at which a project should be accepted D. None of the above 6. (TCO 7) What can be said about the optimal capital structure of a firm? (Points : 6) A. The point at which added tax savings from debt just equals cost of bankruptcy B. Point where financial leverage = 1 C. The point where a firm’s WACC is maximized 7. (TCO 3) Which of the following is not true about corporate bonds? (Points : 6) A. Once sold in the initial offering, they are rarely sold again in the open market. B. Bond offerings are overseen by the SEC just like stock IPOs. C. The shelf registration process is sometimes used. D. None of the above 8. (TCO 9) What is the concept behind M&M Principle 1 in a world of no taxes? (Points : 6) A. The higher the corporate tax rate, the higher the firm value. B. If there are no taxes, the value of the firm is unaffected by capital structure. C. Capital structure is primarily determined by a firm’s WACC. D. None of the above 9. (TCO 6) Which is true about the normal yield curve? (Points : 6) A. It’s rarely a straight, horizontal line. B. Its primary component is liquidity risk. C. Its primary component is inflation premium. D. None of the above 10. (TCO 4) Where could you find trend information about the bond market? (Points : 6) A. Dow Jones Average B. NASDAQ C. S&P 500 D. None of the above 11. (TCO 8) Who would normally be concerned about the creation of an investment policy? (Points : 6) A. Institutional investors B. 401k plan managers C. Pension fund managers D. All of the above 12. (TCOs 1, 8) Corporate bonds, T-bonds, and preferred stock are all examples of which of the following? (Points : 6) A. Investment options for an investor seeking low risk B. Investment options for an investor seeking high return for the high risk he or she is taking C. Fixed-income securities D. None of the above 13. (TCO 6) What is the objective of portfolio diversification? (Points : 6) A. Maximize return B. Minimize risk C. Minimize return per unit of risk D. Maximize return per unit of risk 14. (TCO 5) What does the term structure of interest rates refer to? (Points : 6) A. The fact that long-term interest rates are always higher than short-term interest rates B. The relationship between bond maturities and interest rates C. Why the expectations theory and liquidity preference theory are contradictory

(TCO 1) Which of the following is true about fixed-income securities? (Points : 6)
A. They are usually found on the income statement.
B. They are always found on the left side of the balance sheet.
C. They are usually shown on the right side of the balance sheet.
D. None of the above

2. (TCO 2) The concept of risk versus return _______. (Points : 6)
A. dictates that higher risk investments should earn a higher return
B. dictates that risk and return usually have a covariance of -1
C. shows that risk-loving investors always want to earn double the return of risk-averse investors
D. None of the above

3. (TCO 5) Which of the following is true? (Points : 6)
A. YTM is the same as a bond’s coupon yield in all cases.
B. YTM reflects the total return to a bondholder, taking time value of money into account.
C. Yield to call is of interest to companies issuing redeemable bonds only.
D. None of the above

4. (TCO 9) Financial leverage is _______. (Points : 6)
A. always a good thing
B. a good thing when sales are falling
C. a good thing when sales are rising
D. None of the above

5. (TOC 9) A firm’s WACC refers to what? (Points : 6)
A. Relevance to the capital budgeting process called simple payback
B. The cost of capital used for NPV calculations
C. The maximum amount of return at which a project should be accepted
D. None of the above

6. (TCO 7) What can be said about the optimal capital structure of a firm? (Points : 6)
A. The point at which added tax savings from debt just equals cost of bankruptcy
B. Point where financial leverage = 1
C. The point where a firm’s WACC is maximized

7. (TCO 3) Which of the following is not true about corporate bonds? (Points : 6)
A. Once sold in the initial offering, they are rarely sold again in the open market.
B. Bond offerings are overseen by the SEC just like stock IPOs.
C. The shelf registration process is sometimes used.
D. None of the above

8. (TCO 9) What is the concept behind M&M Principle 1 in a world of no taxes? (Points : 6)
A. The higher the corporate tax rate, the higher the firm value.
B. If there are no taxes, the value of the firm is unaffected by capital structure.
C. Capital structure is primarily determined by a firm’s WACC.
D. None of the above

9. (TCO 6) Which is true about the normal yield curve? (Points : 6)
A. It’s rarely a straight, horizontal line.
B. Its primary component is liquidity risk.
C. Its primary component is inflation premium.
D. None of the above

10. (TCO 4) Where could you find trend information about the bond market? (Points : 6)
A. Dow Jones Average
B. NASDAQ
C. S&P 500
D. None of the above

11. (TCO 8) Who would normally be concerned about the creation of an investment policy? (Points : 6)
A. Institutional investors
B. 401k plan managers
C. Pension fund managers
D. All of the above

12. (TCOs 1, 8) Corporate bonds, T-bonds, and preferred stock are all examples of which of the following? (Points : 6)
A. Investment options for an investor seeking low risk
B. Investment options for an investor seeking high return for the high risk he or she is taking
C. Fixed-income securities
D. None of the above

13. (TCO 6) What is the objective of portfolio diversification? (Points : 6)
A. Maximize return
B. Minimize risk
C. Minimize return per unit of risk
D. Maximize return per unit of risk

14. (TCO 5) What does the term structure of interest rates refer to? (Points : 6)
A. The fact that long-term interest rates are always higher than short-term interest rates
B. The relationship between bond maturities and interest rates
C. Why the expectations theory and liquidity preference theory are contradictory

Read More

For this 2-4 page written Assignment, select a disorder of the brain that you are interested in learning more about. Describe the disorder, making sure to answer the following questions in your discussion of the disorder: 1. Which parts of the brain are believed to be involved in this disorder, and how do these areas of the brain influence the development and behavior of the individual? 2. Briefly describe at least one method which has been used to study this disorder (EEG, fMRI, etc.), and what this method involves. 3. Describe at least one neurotransmitter(s) that is believed to function abnormally in this disorder, and how this impacts on the behavior of the individual.

For this 2-4 page written Assignment, select a disorder of the brain that you are interested in learning
more about. Describe the disorder, making sure to answer the following questions in your discussion of
the disorder:

1. Which parts of the brain are believed to be involved in this disorder, and how do these areas of
the brain influence the development and behavior of the individual?
2. Briefly describe at least one method which has been used to study this disorder (EEG, fMRI,
etc.), and what this method involves.
3. Describe at least one neurotransmitter(s) that is believed to function abnormally in this
disorder, and how this impacts on the behavior of the individual.

Read More

Need help to complete the following case studies Microsoft Excel template answers must show all work and calculations. 1. 5-2 Artist’s Performance Royalties Performance rights organizations track and pay royalties to song writers, publishers, and musicians for use of their works. Royalties are paid to an artist based on a complicated credit system using a formula with weights assigned for a variety of factors, including the following: • Use: weight based on the type of song or performance (theme, underscore, or promotional). • Licensee: weight based on the station’s licensing fee, which is determined by the size of the licensee’s markets and number of stations carrying its broadcast signal. • Time-of-Day: weight assigned according to whether the performances are broadcast during peak viewing or listening times. • Follow-the-Dollar: factor based on the medium from which the money came (radio play, live performance, TV performance, and so on). • General Licensing Allocation: based on fees collected from bars, hotels, and other nonbroadcast licensees. These amounts are multiplied together, and then a radio feature premium is added, if applicable, to arrive at a total number of credits for the particular artist, or his or her credit total for a particular reporting period. Royalties are usually split among the writer, the publisher, and possibly a performer if the writer does not perform his or her own work. The proportion that each party receives is called the share value. All of the money collected for the reporting period divided by the total number of credits for all performers is called the credit value. An artist who wants to figure out what money he or she will receive for a period has to multiply the three factors; credit total, share value, and credit value. 1-1. Ziam wants to know how much his royalty will be for a song he has written. How will it be calculated? Write the steps or the formulas that will be used to calculate his royalty payment. 1-2. Ziam has written a popular song entitled “Going There,” which has been recorded by a well-known performer. He recently received a royalty check for $7,000. If Ziam gets a 0.5 share of the royalties and the credit value is $3.50, what was the credit total that his song earned? Write out the problem in the form of an equation and solve it. 1-3. Ziam quickly published another song, “Take Me There,” that is played even more often than “Going There.” If his first song earns 4,000 credits and his second song earns 6,000 credits, what will the royalty payment be from the two songs if the credit value remains at $3.50?C 1-A4. Ziam is considering an offer to perform his own songs on a CD to be titled “Waiting There.” In the past he has written, but not performed, his music. If Ziam’s royalty is 0.12 of the suggested retail price of $15.00, but 0.25 of the retail price is deducted for packaging before Ziam’s royalty is calculated, how much will he receive for sale of the CD? Write your answer in the form of an equation and solve it.SE 2. 6-2 Customer Relationship Management Systems, Inc., is one of the country’s leading media and communications organizations. Media Systems’ primary challenge is how to effectively manage its diverse customer base. The company has 70,000 publication subscribers, 58,000 advertisers, 30,000 telephone services customers, and 18,000 ISP (Internet service provider) customers. The company had little information about who its customers truly were, which products they were using, and how satisfied they were with the service they received. That’s where Minh and his company, Customer Solution Technologies, LLC, came in. Through the use of customer relationship management software, Minh believed Media Systems would be able to substantially improve its ability to cross-sell and up-sell multiple media and communications services to customers, while substantially reducing customer complaints. 2-1. What percentage of the total does each of the four customer groups represent? Round to the nearest hundredth of a percent. CASE STUDIES 2-2. Minh’s data shows that on average, only 4.6% of customers were purchasing complementary services available within Media Systems. By using his company’s services, Minh was projecting that these percentages would triple across all user groups within one year. How many customers would that equate to in total for each group? What would be the difference compared to current levels? 3. Customer complaint data showed that within the last year, complaints by category were as follows: publication subscribers, 1,174; advertisers, 423; telephone service customers, 4,411; and ISP customers 823. What percentage of customers (round to two decimal places) complained within the last year in each category? If the CRM software

Need help to complete the following case studies
Microsoft Excel template answers must show all work and calculations.

1. 5-2 Artist’s Performance Royalties
Performance rights organizations track and pay royalties to song writers, publishers, and musicians for use of their works. Royalties are paid to an artist based on a complicated credit system using a formula with weights assigned for a variety of factors, including the following:

• Use: weight based on the type of song or performance (theme, underscore, or promotional).
• Licensee: weight based on the station’s licensing fee, which is determined by the size of the
licensee’s markets and number of stations carrying its broadcast signal.
• Time-of-Day: weight assigned according to whether the performances are broadcast during peak
viewing or listening times.
• Follow-the-Dollar: factor based on the medium from which the money came (radio play, live
performance, TV performance, and so on).
• General Licensing Allocation: based on fees collected from bars, hotels, and other nonbroadcast
licensees.
These amounts are multiplied together, and then a radio feature premium is added, if applicable, to
arrive at a total number of credits for the particular artist, or his or her credit total for a particular
reporting period. Royalties are usually split among the writer, the publisher, and possibly a performer if
the writer does not perform his or her own work. The proportion that each party receives is called the share value. All of the money collected
for the reporting period divided by the total number of credits for all performers is called the credit value. An artist who wants to figure out
what money he or she will receive for a period has to multiply the three factors; credit total, share value, and credit value.

1-1. Ziam wants to know how much his royalty will be for a song he has written. How will it be calculated? Write the steps or the formulas
that will be used to calculate his royalty payment.

1-2. Ziam has written a popular song entitled “Going There,” which has been recorded by a well-known performer. He recently received a
royalty check for $7,000. If Ziam gets a 0.5 share of the royalties and the credit value is $3.50, what was the credit total that his song
earned? Write out the problem in the form of an equation and solve it.

1-3. Ziam quickly published another song, “Take Me There,” that is played even more often than “Going There.” If his first song earns 4,000
credits and his second song earns 6,000 credits, what will the royalty payment be from the two songs if the credit value remains at $3.50?C

1-A4. Ziam is considering an offer to perform his own songs on a CD to be titled “Waiting There.” In the past he has written, but not performed,
his music. If Ziam’s royalty is 0.12 of the suggested retail price of $15.00, but 0.25 of the retail price is deducted for packaging before
Ziam’s royalty is calculated, how much will he receive for sale of the CD? Write your answer in the form of an equation and solve it.SE

2. 6-2 Customer Relationship Management
Systems, Inc., is one of the country’s leading media and communications organizations. Media Systems’
primary challenge is how to effectively manage its diverse customer base. The company has
70,000 publication subscribers, 58,000 advertisers, 30,000 telephone services customers, and
18,000 ISP (Internet service provider) customers. The company had little information about who its
customers truly were, which products they were using, and how satisfied they were with the service
they received. That’s where Minh and his company, Customer Solution Technologies, LLC, came
in. Through the use of customer relationship management software, Minh believed Media Systems
would be able to substantially improve its ability to cross-sell and up-sell multiple media and communications
services to customers, while substantially reducing customer complaints.

2-1. What percentage of the total does each of the four customer groups represent?
Round to the nearest hundredth of a percent.
CASE STUDIES

2-2. Minh’s data shows that on average, only 4.6% of customers were purchasing complementary services available within Media Systems.
By using his company’s services, Minh was projecting that these percentages would triple across all user groups within one year. How
many customers would that equate to in total for each group? What would be the difference compared to current levels?

3. Customer complaint data showed that within the last year, complaints by category were as follows: publication subscribers, 1,174; advertisers,
423; telephone service customers, 4,411; and ISP customers 823. What percentage of customers (round to two decimal places)
complained within the last year in each category? If the CRM software

Read More

Begging Trial Balance 1. Each account balance should be entered in the General Ledger. ————————————————————————————– Pure Water, Inc. Trial Balance June 30.XXXXX30,635 Account Receivable dr 2,300 Supplies Dr 1,370 Land Dr 17,000 Furniture 3,600 Equipment Dr 2,400 Vehicles Dr 35,800 Account Payable Cr 4,380 Notes Payable Cr 35,800 Common Stock Cr 52,500 Dividends Dr 5,300 Service Revenue Cr 11,600 Salaries Expense Dr 2,200 Rent Expense Dr 1,800 Utilities Expense Dr 1,300 Advertising Expense Dr 325 Miscellaneous Expense DrXXXXX104,280 Cr 104,280 Pure Water, Inc. CHART OF ACCOUNTS – PERPETUAL INVENTORY SYSTEM NORMAL ACCOUNT BALANCE NUMBER ACCOUNT DESCRIPTION DEBIT 110 Cash in Bank DEBIT 120 Accounts Receivable DEBIT 130 Office Supplies inventory DEBIT 150 Prepaid Rent DEBIT 160 Office Furniture DEBIT 210 Store Equipment DEBIT 215 Land DEBIT 220 Vehicles CREDIT 279 Accumulated Depreciation – Store Equipment CREDIT 289 Accumulated Depreciation – Vehicles CREDIT 299 Accumulated Depreciation – Office Furniture CREDIT 310 Accounts Payable CREDIT 315 Salaries Payable CREDIT 320 Unearned Revenue CREDIT 330 Income Taxes Payable CREDIT 340 Notes Payable CREDIT 410 Common Stock CREDIT 420 Additional Paid-in Capital DEBIT 430 Dividends CREDIT 440 Retained Earnings ZERO 499 INCOME SUMMARY (special year-end clearing account) CREDIT 510 Service Revenue DEBIT 710 Payroll Tax Expense DEBIT 720 Salaries Expense DEBIT 730 Rent Expense DEBIT 740 Utility Expense DEBIT 760 Freight-Out (Delivery Expense) DEBIT 765 Advertising Expense DEBIT 770 Insurance Expense DEBIT 780 Depreciation Expense – Store Equipment DEBIT 785 Depreciation Expense – Vehicles DEBIT 790 Supplies Expense DEBIT 800 Miscellaneous Expense DEBIT 810 Income Tax Expense ———————————————————————————————————————————– General Journal 2. The General Journal should be used to enter each transaction by date. The transactions are for the month of July 2012. Please use the accounts that are listed on the Chart of Accounts only. Include explanations for each entry. The journal sheet may be duplicated for all journal related steps in the accounting cycle. For example, you will need separate sheets for adjusting and closing entries. July July 1 Paid three months’ rent, $7,200 4 Performed service for a customer and received cash, $2,100. 9 Received $2,700 from customers for services to be performed later. 12 Purchased $950 of supplies on account. 15 Billed customers for services performed, $2,600. 16 Paid receptionist’s salary, $550 22 Received $3,100 on account. 25 Paid $2,000 on account. 28 Received $1,600 cash for services performed. 30 Paid $900 of dividends. Part 2 Requirements 1. Journalize the transactions that occurred in July. Omit Explanations. 2. Using four-Column account, post the transactions to the ledger creating new ledger accounts as necessary. Omit posting references. Calculate the new account balance at July 31. 3. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July. 4. Journalize and post the adjusting entries for July based on the following adjustment information: a. Record the expired rent. b. Supplies on hand, $200. c. Depreciation: $100 equipment, $75 furniture, $330vehicles. d. Services performed but unbilled, $1,900. e. Accrued salaries, $550. f. Unearned service revenue earned as of July 31, $1,000. 5. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July. 6. Prepare the income statement and statement of retained earnings for the Three-month period May 1 through July 31. 2012. Also prepare a balance sheet at July 31. 2012 7. Prepare and post-closing entries 8. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31. 2012. Worksheet Following Step 3, a ten column worksheet should be compiled. The first two columns will consist of the detail from Step 3. The worksheet will be completed simultaneously with Steps 3-5 above in Part III. The worksheet will assist in the preparation of the financial statements in Step 6. Income Taxes Income taxes should be computed using a 35% tax rate. This information should be placed on the worksheet and on the applicable financial statement(s). Financial Statements Templates have been created and should be updated accordingly.

Begging Trial Balance

1. Each account balance should be entered in the General Ledger.
————————————————————————————–
Pure Water, Inc.
Trial Balance
June 30.XXXXX30,635
Account Receivable dr 2,300
Supplies Dr 1,370
Land Dr 17,000
Furniture 3,600
Equipment Dr 2,400
Vehicles Dr 35,800

Account Payable Cr 4,380
Notes Payable Cr 35,800
Common Stock Cr 52,500

Dividends Dr 5,300

Service Revenue Cr 11,600

Salaries Expense Dr 2,200
Rent Expense Dr 1,800
Utilities Expense Dr 1,300
Advertising Expense Dr 325
Miscellaneous Expense DrXXXXX104,280 Cr 104,280

Pure Water, Inc.
CHART OF ACCOUNTS – PERPETUAL INVENTORY SYSTEM
NORMAL ACCOUNT
BALANCE NUMBER ACCOUNT DESCRIPTION
DEBIT 110 Cash in Bank
DEBIT 120 Accounts Receivable
DEBIT 130 Office Supplies inventory
DEBIT 150 Prepaid Rent
DEBIT 160 Office Furniture
DEBIT 210 Store Equipment
DEBIT 215 Land
DEBIT 220 Vehicles
CREDIT 279 Accumulated Depreciation – Store Equipment
CREDIT 289 Accumulated Depreciation – Vehicles
CREDIT 299 Accumulated Depreciation – Office Furniture
CREDIT 310 Accounts Payable
CREDIT 315 Salaries Payable
CREDIT 320 Unearned Revenue
CREDIT 330 Income Taxes Payable
CREDIT 340 Notes Payable
CREDIT 410 Common Stock
CREDIT 420 Additional Paid-in Capital
DEBIT 430 Dividends
CREDIT 440 Retained Earnings
ZERO 499 INCOME SUMMARY (special year-end clearing account)
CREDIT 510 Service Revenue
DEBIT 710 Payroll Tax Expense
DEBIT 720 Salaries Expense
DEBIT 730 Rent Expense
DEBIT 740 Utility Expense
DEBIT 760 Freight-Out (Delivery Expense)
DEBIT 765 Advertising Expense
DEBIT 770 Insurance Expense
DEBIT 780 Depreciation Expense – Store Equipment
DEBIT 785 Depreciation Expense – Vehicles
DEBIT 790 Supplies Expense
DEBIT 800 Miscellaneous Expense
DEBIT 810 Income Tax Expense

———————————————————————————————————————————–

General Journal
2. The General Journal should be used to enter each transaction by date. The transactions are for the month of July 2012. Please use the accounts that are listed on the Chart of Accounts only. Include explanations for each entry. The journal sheet may be duplicated for all journal related steps in the accounting cycle. For example, you will need separate sheets for adjusting and closing entries.

July

July
1 Paid three months’ rent, $7,200
4 Performed service for a customer and received cash, $2,100.
9 Received $2,700 from customers for services to be performed later.
12 Purchased $950 of supplies on account.
15 Billed customers for services performed, $2,600.
16 Paid receptionist’s salary, $550
22 Received $3,100 on account.
25 Paid $2,000 on account.
28 Received $1,600 cash for services performed.
30 Paid $900 of dividends.

Part 2

Requirements

1. Journalize the transactions that occurred in July. Omit Explanations.

2. Using four-Column account, post the transactions to the ledger creating new ledger accounts as necessary. Omit posting references. Calculate the new account balance at July 31.

3. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July.

4. Journalize and post the adjusting entries for July based on the following adjustment information:
a. Record the expired rent.
b. Supplies on hand, $200.
c. Depreciation: $100 equipment, $75 furniture, $330vehicles.
d. Services performed but unbilled, $1,900.
e. Accrued salaries, $550.
f. Unearned service revenue earned as of July 31, $1,000.

5. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July.

6. Prepare the income statement and statement of retained earnings for the Three-month period May 1 through July 31. 2012. Also prepare a balance sheet at July 31. 2012

7. Prepare and post-closing entries

8. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31. 2012.

Worksheet
Following Step 3, a ten column worksheet should be compiled. The first two columns will consist of the detail from Step 3. The worksheet will be completed simultaneously with Steps 3-5 above in Part III. The worksheet will assist in the preparation of the financial statements in Step 6.
Income Taxes
Income taxes should be computed using a 35% tax rate. This information should be placed on the worksheet and on the applicable financial statement(s).
Financial Statements
Templates have been created and should be updated accordingly.

Read More

Begging Trial Balance 1. Each account balance should be entered in the General Ledger. ————————————————————————————– Pure Water, Inc. Trial Balance June 30.XXXXX30,635 Account Receivable dr 2,300 Supplies Dr 1,370 Land Dr 17,000 Furniture 3,600 Equipment Dr 2,400 Vehicles Dr 35,800 Account Payable Cr 4,380 Notes Payable Cr 35,800 Common Stock Cr 52,500 Dividends Dr 5,300 Service Revenue Cr 11,600 Salaries Expense Dr 2,200 Rent Expense Dr 1,800 Utilities Expense Dr 1,300 Advertising Expense Dr 325 Miscellaneous Expense DrXXXXX104,280 Cr 104,280 Pure Water, Inc. CHART OF ACCOUNTS – PERPETUAL INVENTORY SYSTEM NORMAL ACCOUNT BALANCE NUMBER ACCOUNT DESCRIPTION DEBIT 110 Cash in Bank DEBIT 120 Accounts Receivable DEBIT 130 Office Supplies inventory DEBIT 150 Prepaid Rent DEBIT 160 Office Furniture DEBIT 210 Store Equipment DEBIT 215 Land DEBIT 220 Vehicles CREDIT 279 Accumulated Depreciation – Store Equipment CREDIT 289 Accumulated Depreciation – Vehicles CREDIT 299 Accumulated Depreciation – Office Furniture CREDIT 310 Accounts Payable CREDIT 315 Salaries Payable CREDIT 320 Unearned Revenue CREDIT 330 Income Taxes Payable CREDIT 340 Notes Payable CREDIT 410 Common Stock CREDIT 420 Additional Paid-in Capital DEBIT 430 Dividends CREDIT 440 Retained Earnings ZERO 499 INCOME SUMMARY (special year-end clearing account) CREDIT 510 Service Revenue DEBIT 710 Payroll Tax Expense DEBIT 720 Salaries Expense DEBIT 730 Rent Expense DEBIT 740 Utility Expense DEBIT 760 Freight-Out (Delivery Expense) DEBIT 765 Advertising Expense DEBIT 770 Insurance Expense DEBIT 780 Depreciation Expense – Store Equipment DEBIT 785 Depreciation Expense – Vehicles DEBIT 790 Supplies Expense DEBIT 800 Miscellaneous Expense DEBIT 810 Income Tax Expense ———————————————————————————————————————————– General Journal 2. The General Journal should be used to enter each transaction by date. The transactions are for the month of July 2012. Please use the accounts that are listed on the Chart of Accounts only. Include explanations for each entry. The journal sheet may be duplicated for all journal related steps in the accounting cycle. For example, you will need separate sheets for adjusting and closing entries. July July 1 Paid three months’ rent, $7,200 4 Performed service for a customer and received cash, $2,100. 9 Received $2,700 from customers for services to be performed later. 12 Purchased $950 of supplies on account. 15 Billed customers for services performed, $2,600. 16 Paid receptionist’s salary, $550 22 Received $3,100 on account. 25 Paid $2,000 on account. 28 Received $1,600 cash for services performed. 30 Paid $900 of dividends. Part 2 Requirements 1. Journalize the transactions that occurred in July. Omit Explanations. 2. Using four-Column account, post the transactions to the ledger creating new ledger accounts as necessary. Omit posting references. Calculate the new account balance at July 31. 3. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July. 4. Journalize and post the adjusting entries for July based on the following adjustment information: a. Record the expired rent. b. Supplies on hand, $200. c. Depreciation: $100 equipment, $75 furniture, $330vehicles. d. Services performed but unbilled, $1,900. e. Accrued salaries, $550. f. Unearned service revenue earned as of July 31, $1,000. 5. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July. 6. Prepare the income statement and statement of retained earnings for the Three-month period May 1 through July 31. 2012. Also prepare a balance sheet at July 31. 2012 7. Prepare and post-closing entries 8. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31. 2012. Worksheet Following Step 3, a ten column worksheet should be compiled. The first two columns will consist of the detail from Step 3. The worksheet will be completed simultaneously with Steps 3-5 above in Part III. The worksheet will assist in the preparation of the financial statements in Step 6. Income Taxes Income taxes should be computed using a 35% tax rate. This information should be placed on the worksheet and on the applicable financial statement(s). Financial Statements Templates have been created and should be updated accordingly.

Begging Trial Balance

1. Each account balance should be entered in the General Ledger.
————————————————————————————–
Pure Water, Inc.
Trial Balance
June 30.XXXXX30,635
Account Receivable dr 2,300
Supplies Dr 1,370
Land Dr 17,000
Furniture 3,600
Equipment Dr 2,400
Vehicles Dr 35,800

Account Payable Cr 4,380
Notes Payable Cr 35,800
Common Stock Cr 52,500

Dividends Dr 5,300

Service Revenue Cr 11,600

Salaries Expense Dr 2,200
Rent Expense Dr 1,800
Utilities Expense Dr 1,300
Advertising Expense Dr 325
Miscellaneous Expense DrXXXXX104,280 Cr 104,280

Pure Water, Inc.
CHART OF ACCOUNTS – PERPETUAL INVENTORY SYSTEM
NORMAL ACCOUNT
BALANCE NUMBER ACCOUNT DESCRIPTION
DEBIT 110 Cash in Bank
DEBIT 120 Accounts Receivable
DEBIT 130 Office Supplies inventory
DEBIT 150 Prepaid Rent
DEBIT 160 Office Furniture
DEBIT 210 Store Equipment
DEBIT 215 Land
DEBIT 220 Vehicles
CREDIT 279 Accumulated Depreciation – Store Equipment
CREDIT 289 Accumulated Depreciation – Vehicles
CREDIT 299 Accumulated Depreciation – Office Furniture
CREDIT 310 Accounts Payable
CREDIT 315 Salaries Payable
CREDIT 320 Unearned Revenue
CREDIT 330 Income Taxes Payable
CREDIT 340 Notes Payable
CREDIT 410 Common Stock
CREDIT 420 Additional Paid-in Capital
DEBIT 430 Dividends
CREDIT 440 Retained Earnings
ZERO 499 INCOME SUMMARY (special year-end clearing account)
CREDIT 510 Service Revenue
DEBIT 710 Payroll Tax Expense
DEBIT 720 Salaries Expense
DEBIT 730 Rent Expense
DEBIT 740 Utility Expense
DEBIT 760 Freight-Out (Delivery Expense)
DEBIT 765 Advertising Expense
DEBIT 770 Insurance Expense
DEBIT 780 Depreciation Expense – Store Equipment
DEBIT 785 Depreciation Expense – Vehicles
DEBIT 790 Supplies Expense
DEBIT 800 Miscellaneous Expense
DEBIT 810 Income Tax Expense

———————————————————————————————————————————–

General Journal
2. The General Journal should be used to enter each transaction by date. The transactions are for the month of July 2012. Please use the accounts that are listed on the Chart of Accounts only. Include explanations for each entry. The journal sheet may be duplicated for all journal related steps in the accounting cycle. For example, you will need separate sheets for adjusting and closing entries.

July

July
1 Paid three months’ rent, $7,200
4 Performed service for a customer and received cash, $2,100.
9 Received $2,700 from customers for services to be performed later.
12 Purchased $950 of supplies on account.
15 Billed customers for services performed, $2,600.
16 Paid receptionist’s salary, $550
22 Received $3,100 on account.
25 Paid $2,000 on account.
28 Received $1,600 cash for services performed.
30 Paid $900 of dividends.

Part 2

Requirements

1. Journalize the transactions that occurred in July. Omit Explanations.

2. Using four-Column account, post the transactions to the ledger creating new ledger accounts as necessary. Omit posting references. Calculate the new account balance at July 31.

3. Prepare the unadjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July.

4. Journalize and post the adjusting entries for July based on the following adjustment information:
a. Record the expired rent.
b. Supplies on hand, $200.
c. Depreciation: $100 equipment, $75 furniture, $330vehicles.
d. Services performed but unbilled, $1,900.
e. Accrued salaries, $550.
f. Unearned service revenue earned as of July 31, $1,000.

5. Prepare an adjusted trial balance for Pure Water, Inc., at the end of July.

6. Prepare the income statement and statement of retained earnings for the Three-month period May 1 through July 31. 2012. Also prepare a balance sheet at July 31. 2012

7. Prepare and post-closing entries

8. Prepare a post-closing trial balance at July 31. 2012.

Worksheet
Following Step 3, a ten column worksheet should be compiled. The first two columns will consist of the detail from Step 3. The worksheet will be completed simultaneously with Steps 3-5 above in Part III. The worksheet will assist in the preparation of the financial statements in Step 6.
Income Taxes
Income taxes should be computed using a 35% tax rate. This information should be placed on the worksheet and on the applicable financial statement(s).
Financial Statements
Templates have been created and should be updated accordingly.

Read More

2010. During the first month of operations the following transactions occurred: Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $1,000 of such services was earned but not yet billed to the insurance companies. Salaries were incurred totaling $650 but not paid at month-end. Supplies totaling $600 were purchased on account. Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Omit explanations. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10) 3. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: William Bryant is the new owner of Ace Computer Services. At the end of August 2010, his first month of ownership, Bryant is trying to prepare monthly financial statements. At August 31, Bryant owed his employees $2,000 in wages that will be paid on September 1. At the end of the month he had not yet received the month’s utility bill. Based on past experience, he estimated that the bill would be approximately $800. A telephone bill in the amount of $317 covering August charges is unpaid at August 31. You are to provide the missing adjusting entries that must be made. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit (Points : 10) 4. (TCO B) Adjusting entries: When the accounts of Constantine Inc. are examined, the adjusting data listed below are uncovered on December 31, the end of annual fiscal period. The prepaid insurance account shows a debit of $9,000, representing the cost of a 2-year fire insurance policy dated August 1 of the current year. On November 1, Rental Revenue was credited for $4,000, representing revenue from a sub-rental for a 3-month period beginning on that date. Interest of $900 has accrued on notes payable. You are to prepare the missing adjusting entry. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10) 5. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: On April 1, 2010, Prince Company assigns $500,000 of its Accounts Receivable to the Third National Bank as collateral for a $300,000 loan due July 1, 2010. The assignment agreement calls for Prince Company to continue to collect the receivables. Third National Bank asses a finance charge of 2% of the accounts receivable, and interest on the loan is 10% (a realistic rate of interest for a note of this Type:). Prepare the journal entry for Prince’s collection of $350,000 of the accounts receivable during the period from April 1, 2010 through June 30, 2010. You are to prepare the missing adjusting entry. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10) 6. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: Wizard Industries purchase $12,000 of merchandise on February 1, 2010, subject to a trade discount of 105 and with credit terms of 3/15/, n/60. It returned $3,000 (gross price before trade or cash discount) on February 4. The invoice was paid on February 13. Assuming that Wizard uses the periodic method for recoding merchandise transactions, record the purchase, return, and payment using the gross method. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10) 7. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: Shabbona Corporation operates a retail computer store. To improve delivery services to customers, the company purchased a new truck on April 1, 2010. The terms for the acquisition of the truck are: it has a list price of $15,000 and is acquired for a cash payment of $13,900. Write the journal entry to record the purchase of the truck. Write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10) 8. (TCO D) The adjusted trial balance of Cavamanlis Co. as of December 31, 2011 contains the following: Account Titles Dr Cr Cash $18,972 Accounts Receivable 6,920 Prepaid Rent 4,280 Equipment 20,050 Accumulated Depreciation $5,895 Notes Payable 5,700 Accounts Payable 4,472 Common Stock 20,000 Retained Earnings 15,310 Dividends 4,000 Service Revenue 12,590 Salaries Expense 6,840 Rent Expense 2,760 Depreciation Expense 145 Interest Expense 83 Interest Payable 83 $64,050 $64,050 Instructions Prepare in good form a balance sheet for the year ended December 31, 2011. (Points : 15) 1. (TCO C) Flynn Design Agency was founded by Kevin Flynn in January 2009. Presented below is the adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2010. Flynn Design Agency Adjusted Trial Balance December 31, 2010 Account Titles Dr Cr Cash $10,000 Accounts Receivable 21,500 Art Supplies 5,000 Prepaid Insurance 2,500 Printing Equipment 60,000 Accumulated Depreciation $35,000 Accounts Payable 8,000 Interest Payable 150 Notes Payable 5,000 Unearned Advertising Revenue 5,600 Salaries Payable 1,300 Common Stock 10,000 Retained Earnings 3,500 Advertising Revenue 58,500 Salaries Expense 12,300 Insurance Expense 850 Interest Expense 500 Depreciation Expense 7,000 Art Supplies Expense 3,400 Rent Expense 4,000 Total $127,050 $127,050 Prepare a single-step income statement for the year ending December 31, 2010. (Points : 15) 2. (TCO C) Two accountants for the firm of Allen and Wright are arguing about the merits of presenting an income statement in a multiple-step versus a single-step format. The discussion involves the following 2010 information related to Webster Company. Administrative expense Officers’ salaries $5,900 Depreciation of equipment 3,960 Cost of Goods Sold 73,570 Rental revenue 17,230 Selling Expense Transportation-out 2,690 Sales commission 7,980 Depreciation of equipment 6,480 Sales 116,500 Income tax 10,580 Interest expense 1,860 Prepare a single-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010. (Points : 20) 3. (TCO D) Bruno Company has seceded to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented below in order to obtain additional funds for expansion. Bruno Company Balance Sheet December 31, 2010 Current Assets Cash $280,000 Accounts Receivable (net) 340,000 Inventories at lower of average cost or market 500,000 Trading securities – at cost (fair value $120,000) 140,000 Property, plant and equipment Building (net) 570,000 Office equipment (net) 160,000 Land held for future use 225,000 Intangible assets Goodwill 100,000 Cash surrender value of life insurance 90,000 Prepaid expenses 12,000 Current liabilities Accounts payable 175,000 Notes payable (due next year) 125,000 Pension obligation 122,000 Rent payable 49,000 Premium on bonds payable 53,000 Long-term liabilities Bonds payable 500,000 Stockholders’ Equity Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized 400,000 shares, issued 290,000 340,000 Additional paid-in capital 219,000 Retained earnings ? Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $160,000 and for the office equipment, $105,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $17,000. The pension obligation is considered a long-term liability. (Points : 20) 4. (TCO F) Determine the cash account balance. If the item described is not reported as cash, explain the rationale. Checking account balance $590,000; postdated check from customer $11,000; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $100,000; certified check from customer $9,800; postage stamps on hand $620. (Points : 20) 5. (TCO F) At the end of 2010 Sorter Company has accounts receivable of $900,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $40,000. On January 16, 2011, Sorter Company determined that its receivable from Ordonez Company of $8,000 will not be collected, and management authorized its write-off. What is the net realizable value of Sorter Company’s accounts receivable after the write-off of the Ordonez receivable? (Points : 20) 6. (TCO G) In your audit of Garza Company, you find that a physical inventory on December 31, 2010, showed merchandise with a cost $541,000 was on hand at that date. You also discover the following items were all excluded from the inventory count. •Merchandise of $71,000 which is held by Garza on consignment. The consignee is the Bontemps Company. •Merchandise costing $33,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. shipping point to a customer on December 31, 2010. The customer was expected to receive the merchandise on January 6, 2011. •Merchandise costing $46,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. destination to a customer on December 29, 2010. The customer was schedule to receive the merchandise on January 2, 2011. •Merchandise costing $73,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 30, 2010, and received b y Garza on January 4, 2011. •Merchandise costing $51,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. destination on December 31, 2010, and received b y Garza on January 5, 2011. Based on the above information, calculate the amount that should appear on Garza’s balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for inventory. (Points : 20) 7. (TCO G) Werth Company asks you to review its December 31, 2010 inventory values and prepare the necessary adjustments to the books. The following information is given to you. •Werth uses the periodic method of recording inventory. A physical count reveals $234,890 of inventory on hand at December 31, 2010. •Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Bubby on December 30, f.o.b. destination. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale on account for $12,800 on December 31. The merchandise cost $7,350, and Bubby received it on January 3. •Not included in inventory is $8,540 of merchandise purchased from Minsky Industries. This merchandise was received on December 31 after the inventory had been counted. The invoice was received and recorded on December 30. •Included in inventory was $10,438 of inventory held by Werth on consignment from Jackel Industries. •Excluded from inventory was a carton labeled “Please accept for credit”. This carton contains merchandise costing $1,500 which had been sold to a customer for $2,600. No entry had been made to the books to reflect the return, but none of the returned merchandise seemed damaged. Determine the proper inventory balance for Werth Company at December 31, 2010. (Points : 20) 8. (TCO H) Pollachek Co. purchased land as a factory site for $450,000. The process of tearing down two old buildings on the site and constructing the factory required 6 months. The company paid $42,000 to tear down the old buildings and sold salvaged lumber and brick for $6,300. Legal fees of $1,850 were paid for title investigation and drawing the purchase contract. Pollachek paid $2,200 to an engineering firm for a land survey, and $65,000 for drawing the factory plans. The land survey had to be made before definitive plans could be drawn. Title insurance on the property cost $1,500, and a liability insurance premium paid during construction was $900. The contractor’s charge for construction was $2,740,000. The company paid the contractor in two installments: $1,200,000 at the end of 3 months and $1,540,000 upon completion. Interest costs of $170,000 were incurred to finance the construction. Determine the cost of the land and the cost of the building as they should be recorded on the books of Pollachek Co. Assume that the land survey was for the building. (Points : 30) 9. (TCO E) Maserati Corporation purchased a new machine for its assembly process on August 1, 2010. The cost of this machine was $150,000. The company estimated that the machine would have a salvage value of $24,000 at the end of its service life. Its life is estimated at 5 years and its working hours are estimated at 21,000 hours. Year-end is December 31. Compute the depreciation expense using the Sum-of-the-years-digits method for 2011. (Points : 30)

2010. During the first month of operations the following transactions occurred: Performed services for patients who had dental plan insurance. At January 31, $1,000 of such services was earned but not yet billed to the insurance companies. Salaries were incurred totaling $650 but not paid at month-end. Supplies totaling $600 were purchased on account. Prepare the adjusting entries on January 31. Omit explanations. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10)

3. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: William Bryant is the new owner of Ace Computer Services. At the end of August 2010, his first month of ownership, Bryant is trying to prepare monthly financial statements. At August 31, Bryant owed his employees $2,000 in wages that will be paid on September 1. At the end of the month he had not yet received the month’s utility bill. Based on past experience, he estimated that the bill would be approximately $800. A telephone bill in the amount of $317 covering August charges is unpaid at August 31. You are to provide the missing adjusting entries that must be made. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit (Points : 10)

4. (TCO B) Adjusting entries: When the accounts of Constantine Inc. are examined, the adjusting data listed below are uncovered on December 31, the end of annual fiscal period. The prepaid insurance account shows a debit of $9,000, representing the cost of a 2-year fire insurance policy dated August 1 of the current year. On November 1, Rental Revenue was credited for $4,000, representing revenue from a sub-rental for a 3-month period beginning on that date. Interest of $900 has accrued on notes payable. You are to prepare the missing adjusting entry. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10)

5. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: On April 1, 2010, Prince Company assigns $500,000 of its Accounts Receivable to the Third National Bank as collateral for a $300,000 loan due July 1, 2010. The assignment agreement calls for Prince Company to continue to collect the receivables. Third National Bank asses a finance charge of 2% of the accounts receivable, and interest on the loan is 10% (a realistic rate of interest for a note of this Type:). Prepare the journal entry for Prince’s collection of $350,000 of the accounts receivable during the period from April 1, 2010 through June 30, 2010. You are to prepare the missing adjusting entry. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10)

6. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: Wizard Industries purchase $12,000 of merchandise on February 1, 2010, subject to a trade discount of 105 and with credit terms of 3/15/, n/60. It returned $3,000 (gross price before trade or cash discount) on February 4. The invoice was paid on February 13. Assuming that Wizard uses the periodic method for recoding merchandise transactions, record the purchase, return, and payment using the gross method. For each journal entry write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10)

7. (TCO B) Adjusting Entries: Shabbona Corporation operates a retail computer store. To improve delivery services to customers, the company purchased a new truck on April 1, 2010. The terms for the acquisition of the truck are: it has a list price of $15,000 and is acquired for a cash payment of $13,900. Write the journal entry to record the purchase of the truck. Write Dr. for debit and Cr. for credit. (Points : 10)

8. (TCO D) The adjusted trial balance of Cavamanlis Co. as of December 31, 2011 contains the following:

Account Titles

Dr

Cr

Cash

$18,972

Accounts Receivable

6,920

Prepaid Rent

4,280

Equipment

20,050

Accumulated Depreciation

$5,895

Notes Payable

5,700

Accounts Payable

4,472

Common Stock

20,000

Retained Earnings

15,310

Dividends

4,000

Service Revenue

12,590

Salaries Expense

6,840

Rent Expense

2,760

Depreciation Expense

145

Interest Expense

83

Interest Payable

83

$64,050

$64,050

Instructions
Prepare in good form a balance sheet for the year ended December 31, 2011. (Points : 15)

1. (TCO C) Flynn Design Agency was founded by Kevin Flynn in January 2009. Presented below is the adjusted trial balance as of December 31, 2010.
Flynn Design Agency
Adjusted Trial Balance
December 31, 2010

Account Titles

Dr

Cr

Cash

$10,000

Accounts Receivable

21,500

Art Supplies

5,000

Prepaid Insurance

2,500

Printing Equipment

60,000

Accumulated Depreciation

$35,000

Accounts Payable

8,000

Interest Payable

150

Notes Payable

5,000

Unearned Advertising Revenue

5,600

Salaries Payable

1,300

Common Stock

10,000

Retained Earnings

3,500

Advertising Revenue

58,500

Salaries Expense

12,300

Insurance Expense

850

Interest Expense

500

Depreciation Expense

7,000

Art Supplies Expense

3,400

Rent Expense

4,000

Total

$127,050

$127,050

Prepare a single-step income statement for the year ending December 31, 2010. (Points : 15)

2. (TCO C) Two accountants for the firm of Allen and Wright are arguing about the merits of presenting an income statement in a multiple-step versus a single-step format. The discussion involves the following 2010 information related to Webster Company.

Administrative expense

Officers’ salaries

$5,900

Depreciation of equipment

3,960

Cost of Goods Sold

73,570

Rental revenue

17,230

Selling Expense

Transportation-out

2,690

Sales commission

7,980

Depreciation of equipment

6,480

Sales

116,500

Income tax

10,580

Interest expense

1,860

Prepare a single-step income statement for the year ended December 31, 2010. (Points : 20)

3. (TCO D) Bruno Company has seceded to expand its operations. The bookkeeper recently completed the balance sheet presented below in order to obtain additional funds for expansion.
Bruno Company
Balance Sheet
December 31, 2010

Current Assets

Cash

$280,000

Accounts Receivable (net)

340,000

Inventories at lower of average cost or market

500,000

Trading securities – at cost (fair value $120,000)

140,000

Property, plant and equipment

Building (net)

570,000

Office equipment (net)

160,000

Land held for future use

225,000

Intangible assets

Goodwill

100,000

Cash surrender value of life insurance

90,000

Prepaid expenses

12,000

Current liabilities

Accounts payable

175,000

Notes payable (due next year)

125,000

Pension obligation

122,000

Rent payable

49,000

Premium on bonds payable

53,000

Long-term liabilities

Bonds payable

500,000

Stockholders’ Equity

Common stock, $1.00 par, authorized

400,000 shares, issued 290,000

340,000

Additional paid-in capital

219,000

Retained earnings

?

Prepare a revised balance sheet given the available information. Assume that the accumulated depreciation balance for the buildings is $160,000 and for the office equipment, $105,000. The allowance for doubtful accounts has a balance of $17,000. The pension obligation is considered a long-term liability. (Points : 20)

4. (TCO F) Determine the cash account balance. If the item described is not reported as cash, explain the rationale. Checking account balance $590,000; postdated check from customer $11,000; cash restricted due to maintaining compensating balance requirement of $100,000; certified check from customer $9,800; postage stamps on hand $620. (Points : 20)

5. (TCO F) At the end of 2010 Sorter Company has accounts receivable of $900,000 and an allowance for doubtful accounts of $40,000. On January 16, 2011, Sorter Company determined that its receivable from Ordonez Company of $8,000 will not be collected, and management authorized its write-off. What is the net realizable value of Sorter Company’s accounts receivable after the write-off of the Ordonez receivable? (Points : 20)

6. (TCO G) In your audit of Garza Company, you find that a physical inventory on December 31, 2010, showed merchandise with a cost $541,000 was on hand at that date. You also discover the following items were all excluded from the inventory count.
•Merchandise of $71,000 which is held by Garza on consignment. The consignee is the Bontemps Company.
•Merchandise costing $33,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. shipping point to a customer on December 31, 2010. The customer was expected to receive the merchandise on January 6, 2011.
•Merchandise costing $46,000 which was shipped by Garza f.o.b. destination to a customer on December 29, 2010. The customer was schedule to receive the merchandise on January 2, 2011.
•Merchandise costing $73,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. shipping point on December 30, 2010, and received b y Garza on January 4, 2011.
•Merchandise costing $51,000 shipped by a vendor f.o.b. destination on December 31, 2010, and received b y Garza on January 5, 2011.
Based on the above information, calculate the amount that should appear on Garza’s balance sheet at December 31, 2010, for inventory. (Points : 20)

7. (TCO G) Werth Company asks you to review its December 31, 2010 inventory values and prepare the necessary adjustments to the books. The following information is given to you.
•Werth uses the periodic method of recording inventory. A physical count reveals $234,890 of inventory on hand at December 31, 2010.
•Included in inventory is merchandise sold to Bubby on December 30, f.o.b. destination. This merchandise was shipped after it was counted. The invoice was prepared and recorded as a sale on account for $12,800 on December 31. The merchandise cost $7,350, and Bubby received it on January 3.
•Not included in inventory is $8,540 of merchandise purchased from Minsky Industries. This merchandise was received on December 31 after the inventory had been counted. The invoice was received and recorded on December 30.
•Included in inventory was $10,438 of inventory held by Werth on consignment from Jackel Industries.
•Excluded from inventory was a carton labeled “Please accept for credit”. This carton contains merchandise costing $1,500 which had been sold to a customer for $2,600. No entry had been made to the books to reflect the return, but none of the returned merchandise seemed damaged.
Determine the proper inventory balance for Werth Company at December 31, 2010. (Points : 20)

8. (TCO H) Pollachek Co. purchased land as a factory site for $450,000. The process of tearing down two old buildings on the site and constructing the factory required 6 months. The company paid $42,000 to tear down the old buildings and sold salvaged lumber and brick for $6,300. Legal fees of $1,850 were paid for title investigation and drawing the purchase contract. Pollachek paid $2,200 to an engineering firm for a land survey, and $65,000 for drawing the factory plans. The land survey had to be made before definitive plans could be drawn. Title insurance on the property cost $1,500, and a liability insurance premium paid during construction was $900. The contractor’s charge for construction was $2,740,000. The company paid the contractor in two installments: $1,200,000 at the end of 3 months and $1,540,000 upon completion. Interest costs of $170,000 were incurred to finance the construction.
Determine the cost of the land and the cost of the building as they should be recorded on the books of Pollachek Co. Assume that the land survey was for the building. (Points : 30)

9. (TCO E) Maserati Corporation purchased a new machine for its assembly process on August 1, 2010. The cost of this machine was $150,000. The company estimated that the machine would have a salvage value of $24,000 at the end of its service life. Its life is estimated at 5 years and its working hours are estimated at 21,000 hours. Year-end is December 31. Compute the depreciation expense using the Sum-of-the-years-digits method for 2011. (Points : 30)

Read More

Week 5 discnn Making Presidential Decisions (graded) President Harry Truman, the first Cold War President, had a sign on his desk saying “The Buck Stops Here.” The Webliography contains a link to the photo and story. Indecisive people can pass on their responsibilities and “pass the buck,” and advisory people can propose their concepts and lobby for acceptance, but the President can ultimately turn to nobody else. Presidents must make the hard decisions. It is a heavy mantle to bear on those presidential shoulders. It is lonely at the top. President Johnson’s “wise men” possessed depth in their areas of expertise beyond that of the President, who was a master mover of legislation to accomplish domestic social programs but very much out of his league in military matters and international relations. To begin, evaluate this question: To what extent was the March 1968 reevaluation of the Vietnam War, as a function of Cold War ideology, accomplished to satisfy domestic concerns rather than international concerns? In a time of mixed obligations, how can we differentiate what is domestic from what is international in American politics? Impact of News Photography (graded) When the dissolution of European colonialism began after World War II, the news media technology of the day was called a “newsreel.” To see the faces and hear the voices of world leaders and reports of events, you would watch one or two short films at the movie theaters along with the movie previews. These newsreels would be weeks or even months old, but they were the closest one could get to witnessing the events that we can see instantaneously on television today. If, as they say, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” then the photographs in newspapers and the filmed newsreels taught powerful lessons. Our textbook contains some powerful photographs that still rivet our attention today. • Page 68 Figure 3.1 – President Eisenhower greeting President Ngo Dinh Diem at Washington National Airport in 1957 • Page 105 Figure 4.3 – The Buddhist monk immolating himself on a Saigon street in 1963 • Page 232 Figure 8.5 – Brigadier General Nguyen Ngoc Loan executing a Viet Cong member on a Saigon street in 1968 • Page 340 Figure 12.2 – President Nixon greeting returning POW LCDR John McCain in 1973 Your assignment is to go on a field trip through the Internet and bring back two photographs for discussion of their impact: one from Vietnam activity (not necessarily combat-related) and one from any other source that you think made significant impact on the public. Be sure to give the URLs in your discussion post for others to go and see them. Then, with each one, write a paragraph about why that photo made significant impact on the public perception of events. Okay, off you go on your field trip. We will await your return. Week 6 discnnn How Diplomacy Involves Saving Face (graded) The class lectures and readings from Dr. Moss’ book speak about how presidents get personally invested in the results of their work, and how that investment impacts the decisions they make. Presidents do not, however, engage in diplomatic negotiations directly. They send ambassadors and negotiators who may be as senior as the Secretary of State, in the example of Dr. Henry Kissinger at the Paris Peace Talks. Diplomats also get personally involved. They get involved with their own desires for career success, as well as their desires for positive outcomes for their own countries. Doing poorly and conceding often requires that negotiators not be embarrassed; that is, that they “save face” for themselves personally and for their governments at home. Let’s start this discussion with the famous leaders mentioned so far in the course: In the Week 6 readings you see their own need to “save face” for themselves and their countries. What are some of the great examples shown so far of “saving face” on the part of diplomats? What does “saving face” mean in diplomatic situations? Welfare of Those Who Serve (graded) By 1968, over one million Americans were stationed outside the United States on their country’s business, wearing the uniform and trying to accomplish the missions of their commander-in-chief. Of that number, over a half million served in and near Vietnam, with that number capped at 549,500 in April 1968. Vietnam assignments “in country” were generally limited to thirteen months fixed duration. Service members reported in and departed individually on fixed departure dates called DEROS (date of rotation) rather than with their whole unit together. How can we assess the impact that deploying individually rather than by unit had on those who served those tours? How might that differ between those who had joined the Army voluntarily and those who had been conscripted for service by the Selective Service System? Week 7 discnn Coping with After-effects of Combat (graded) Everyone reacts to experiences, often for a lifetime. The scars of warfare are not all physical ones. The deepest scars are not seen; they are psychological and well hidden. People who live and work with combat veterans often cope with those effects also, because they relate to those veterans who struggle with their memories and harsh experiences. The Vietnam War differed from other wars, in that the experiences were highly individualized and personalized. Divisions and support units were deployed to Vietnam for many years, and individuals would transfer in and out for tours of specified length, most commonly for 13 months. They would fly in for transfer to replace somebody who had been there for 13 months, or who had been wounded or killed, and then fly out alone to other assignments at the end of their own tour. This system was very destructive to both unit integrity and personal welfare. Perhaps you are, or know some combat veterans from Vietnam. With great care to not violate the privacy of people or divulge their names, what can be understood and applied from the stories of those who served and left their commands and teams to return home individually, as opposed to the experiences of other war veterans? American Foreign Relations After the War (graded) Cold War ideology after World War II fostered the developing viewpoint that the American military was invincible, even as a viable and dangerous enemy worked toward global superiority: the Soviet Union. The practical application of this ideology was the policy of containing the expansionist intentions of global communism as attempted by the Soviet Union in locations of opportunity. The most notable of these proxy confrontations was the attempt to contain the communist threat in Vietnam– the subject of this course. President Nixon and Secretary of State Kissinger labored long and hard to achieve “peace with honor” and end American involvement in Southeast Asia in the Paris Accords of 1973. The failure of that peace to endure is the story that ends our course. Looking beyond the fall of Saigon in April 1975, we will consider how the domino theory ultimately proved false, as President Johnson had speculated: There was no global Communist surge of expansion, and the United States, with its NATO allies and its worldwide interests, did not collapse. How has American ability to act worldwide been affected by the fact that some of the most dire claims made in support of the war ultimately proved wrong?

Week 5 discnn

Making Presidential Decisions (graded)

President Harry Truman, the first Cold War President, had a sign on his desk saying “The Buck Stops Here.” The Webliography contains a link to the photo and story. Indecisive people can pass on their responsibilities and “pass the buck,” and advisory people can propose their concepts and lobby for acceptance, but the President can ultimately turn to nobody else. Presidents must make the hard decisions. It is a heavy mantle to bear on those presidential shoulders. It is lonely at the top.

President Johnson’s “wise men” possessed depth in their areas of expertise beyond that of the President, who was a master mover of legislation to accomplish domestic social programs but very much out of his league in military matters and international relations.

To begin, evaluate this question: To what extent was the March 1968 reevaluation of the Vietnam War, as a function of Cold War ideology, accomplished to satisfy domestic concerns rather than international concerns? In a time of mixed obligations, how can we differentiate what is domestic from what is international in American politics?


Impact of News Photography (graded)

When the dissolution of European colonialism began after World War II, the news media technology of the day was called a “newsreel.” To see the faces and hear the voices of world leaders and reports of events, you would watch one or two short films at the movie theaters along with the movie previews. These newsreels would be weeks or even months old, but they were the closest one could get to witnessing the events that we can see instantaneously on television today. If, as they say, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” then the photographs in newspapers and the filmed newsreels taught powerful lessons. Our textbook contains some powerful photographs that still rivet our attention today.

• Page 68 Figure 3.1 – President Eisenhower greeting President Ngo Dinh Diem at Washington National Airport in 1957
• Page 105 Figure 4.3 – The Buddhist monk immolating himself on a Saigon street in 1963
• Page 232 Figure 8.5 – Brigadier General Nguyen Ngoc Loan executing a Viet Cong member on a Saigon street in 1968
• Page 340 Figure 12.2 – President Nixon greeting returning POW LCDR John McCain in 1973

Your assignment is to go on a field trip through the Internet and bring back two photographs for discussion of their impact: one from Vietnam activity (not necessarily combat-related) and one from any other source that you think made significant impact on the public. Be sure to give the URLs in your discussion post for others to go and see them. Then, with each one, write a paragraph about why that photo made significant impact on the public perception of events. Okay, off you go on your field trip. We will await your return.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Week 6 discnnn


How Diplomacy Involves Saving Face (graded)

The class lectures and readings from Dr. Moss’ book speak about how presidents get personally invested in the results of their work, and how that investment impacts the decisions they make. Presidents do not, however, engage in diplomatic negotiations directly. They send ambassadors and negotiators who may be as senior as the Secretary of State, in the example of Dr. Henry Kissinger at the Paris Peace Talks. Diplomats also get personally involved. They get involved with their own desires for career success, as well as their desires for positive outcomes for their own countries. Doing poorly and conceding often requires that negotiators not be embarrassed; that is, that they “save face” for themselves personally and for their governments at home. Let’s start this discussion with the famous leaders mentioned so far in the course: In the Week 6 readings you see their own need to “save face” for themselves and their countries. What are some of the great examples shown so far of “saving face” on the part of diplomats? What does “saving face” mean in diplomatic situations?

 

 

 

Welfare of Those Who Serve (graded)

By 1968, over one million Americans were stationed outside the United States on their country’s business, wearing the uniform and trying to accomplish the missions of their commander-in-chief. Of that number, over a half million served in and near Vietnam, with that number capped at 549,500 in April 1968.

Vietnam assignments “in country” were generally limited to thirteen months fixed duration. Service members reported in and departed individually on fixed departure dates called DEROS (date of rotation) rather than with their whole unit together.

How can we assess the impact that deploying individually rather than by unit had on those who served those tours? How might that differ between those who had joined the Army voluntarily and those who had been conscripted for service by the Selective Service System?

 

 

 

 

Week 7 discnn

Coping with After-effects of Combat (graded)

Everyone reacts to experiences, often for a lifetime. The scars of warfare are not all physical ones. The deepest scars are not seen; they are psychological and well hidden. People who live and work with combat veterans often cope with those effects also, because they relate to those veterans who struggle with their memories and harsh experiences. The Vietnam War differed from other wars, in that the experiences were highly individualized and personalized. Divisions and support units were deployed to Vietnam for many years, and individuals would transfer in and out for tours of specified length, most commonly for 13 months. They would fly in for transfer to replace somebody who had been there for 13 months, or who had been wounded or killed, and then fly out alone to other assignments at the end of their own tour. This system was very destructive to both unit integrity and personal welfare. Perhaps you are, or know some combat veterans from Vietnam. With great care to not violate the privacy of people or divulge their names, what can be understood and applied from the stories of those who served and left their commands and teams to return home individually, as opposed to the experiences of other war veterans?

American Foreign Relations After the War (graded)

Cold War ideology after World War II fostered the developing viewpoint that the American military was invincible, even as a viable and dangerous enemy worked toward global superiority: the Soviet Union.

The practical application of this ideology was the policy of containing the expansionist intentions of global communism as attempted by the Soviet Union in locations of opportunity. The most notable of these proxy confrontations was the attempt to contain the communist threat in Vietnam– the subject of this course.

President Nixon and Secretary of State Kissinger labored long and hard to achieve “peace with honor” and end American involvement in Southeast Asia in the Paris Accords of 1973. The failure of that peace to endure is the story that ends our course.

Looking beyond the fall of Saigon in April 1975, we will consider how the domino theory ultimately proved false, as President Johnson had speculated: There was no global Communist surge of expansion, and the United States, with its NATO allies and its worldwide interests, did not collapse. How has American ability to act worldwide been affected by the fact that some of the most dire claims made in support of the war ultimately proved wrong?

 

Read More

week 1 discussion Westerners Reading Overseas History (graded) Most people, most of the time, know their own national history better than they know that of other nations, even their neighboring nations. Even though we know our own history better than that of others, we often learned it during our secondary education through factual information about dates, places, and leading personalities. The study of history is much more than memorizing sets of facts and inferences based on facts. The boundary of what constitutes history is a vague one, and it is driven by the broad or narrow viewpoint that is chosen by authors. Every author has a viewpoint, and the authors are motivated to research and write by considerations that are often not made known but which are operating nonetheless. The boundary also intersects a great many academic disciplines to establish the context in which the facts occur and the factors operate. As viewpoints drive authors, so our own viewpoints drive our work as readers and discoverers. As people of “the West,” our perspective is limited by our own experience of living in our own time and place –limits known individually as persons, and collectively as citizens of nations. We discover just how foreign we are as Westerners when we venture across boundaries of time, distance, culture, and language to learn about what happened overseas. What a telling word “overseas” is! So, let’s go on a treasure hunt. What do we need to know that we do not (yet!) know in order to make progress as we begin our study of Vietnam and the 20th-century experience? What do we need to know and discover in order to analyze the history in an expansive sense of that part of Southeast Asia that became known as French Indochina a half century ago? Having thought that through, go hunting to find those things and bring them back to class to tell your classmates about them. This section lists options that can be used to view responses. Rising Tide of Nationalist Expectations (graded) The history and identity of the Vietnamese people reaches very far back. Their hopes and expectations for their own future do not just begin where our class textbook begins (at the end of World War II), nor do their often troubled relations with their neighbors in Southeast Asia. For all the horrors of global warfare, World War II brought such disruption to world order that long-repressed hopes of colonized people found opportunity for new expression and leaders rose to the opportunities for change. Our course is about the whole of 20th-century experience, with the Vietnam War being the centerpiece. For our discussion, let’s start here with TCO #4: How can we best understand how the agrarian Vietnamese people could come together during and after global warfare to restore their national identity and raise up leaders to meet their challenges? Week 2 discussion Failure of Diplomacy in 1954 (graded) The readings and lecture have identified several formative activities that defined the American understanding of world history from 1946 to 1989 (and American activity during that period): Baruch’s labeling of world conflict as the Cold War in 1947, the Truman Doctrine of 1947, and Eisenhower’s figure of speech about falling dominoes. As World War II began, the Vietminh formed as a guerilla army to resist French influence in the Vietnamese portion of Indochina. French respect for the Vietminh was so low that they called it “the barefoot army” – and yet the Vietminh organized over time to defeat much more sophisticated French forces by 1954 at Dien Bien Phu. Let’s discuss how the operating assumptions of conflicting parties and other related nations prohibited constructive discussion at the Geneva Accords meetings of 1954 and brought about the continued failure of the diplomatic process to bring settlement in Vietnam. From diplomatic effort in general and the 1954 Geneva negotiations in particular, what lessons can we learn about necessary conditions and understandings that are essential for conflict negotiations to succeed? Issues of Collective Security (graded) An antecedent to the world situation at the time of the Vietnam War was the first collective security agreement: the League of Nations (1919–1946). President Woodrow Wilson had broken new ground in international relations when he proposed the League of Nations concept in 1919 at the Treaty of Versailles negotiations that followed World War I – known at the time as The Great War. Other collective security agreements relating to the situation in Southeast Asia include the UN, Warsaw Pact, NATO, and SEATO. There were also other agreements elsewhere in the world. The United States was involved in the creation of all these agreements except the Warsaw Pact. What were the purposes to be achieved in collective security agreements? What were the dangers to be avoided, and what were the fears? And what was going on at their creation that made them differ so sharply in form, authority, decision-making ability, and military response capability? Our special concern is the case of SEATO. Treaties and alliances go back as far as written history will take us, but in the 20th century we start something altogether new with collective security agreements. Week 3 discussion Cold War Always Lurking (graded) The Cold War ran from the end of World War II in 1945 to the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989. That is a lot of history, and a great many events occurred in the world during those 44 years. One of them, but only one of them, is the proxy war that we call the Vietnam War. There was always a danger that a rather low-level proxy war could escalate and even rise to the level of nuclear confrontation and war. The dangers were perceived as great – that the Cold War could get hot and out of control. To start, what other events of the Cold War years fit this idea of “proxy war?” What kind of steps did world leaders take to keep Cold War proxy wars from heating up? What were such leaders thinking? Shifting from Advisors to Combatants (graded) Not long before the Vietnam War is considered to have started – around the time period we focus on this class week, 1963 and 1964 – Dag Hammarskjøld of Sweden was serving as Secretary General of the United Nations. He is quoted to have said, “Peacekeeping is not a soldier’s job, but only a soldier can do it.” This quote is often the driving logic behind what came to be known as mlitary operations other than war. With the years prior to this week’s discussions, American forces in southern Vietnam were relatively few and were called “advisors.” They brought American expertise with them for the purpose of training. From 1950 onward, the MAAG and later Special Forces trained Vietnamese forces to serve as a modern combatant force, but in this course week period, American forces moved beyond a partnership arrangement and took on direct combat roles. Such a shift called for decisions at the highest levels. What can we learn about the minds and concerns of American senior leaders that allow for difficult decisions and commitments at such moments – what we might call “turning points?” Week 4 discnn Trying to Succeed in Limited War (graded) Limited war as an ideology depended on a number of assumptions that limited what results could be achieved at the practical level. The standing rules of engagement (ROE) were the practical expression of limited war ideology at the battlefield command and execution level. Think expansively and generatively about the impact of limited war ideology and then discuss these questions with other students: • Within the concept of limited war, what would constitute the “winning” of the Vietnam War? • What sort of successful outcomes would measure the win? • How would we ever know if we had won it? And then, what was the glue that held the lmited war concept together with all its difficulties of thought and application? Formless” and “Frontless” Warfare (graded) The Vietnam War was often described as a “formless war” and a “frontless war.” It resembled no other war in history as seen by military theorists and historians. Thinking expansively, what sorts of assumptions needed to be made and what sorts of values had to be honored in order to make such a formless and frontless war even possible – let alone sustainable? Discuss that issue within our classroom to understand the impact of that situation fully before we discuss what sort of tactics could be effective there. Be thinking ahead a few days as this discussion evolves; be clear in your mind what sort of activities are described by words such as “strategy,” “tactics,” “logistics,” and “attrition.”

week 1 discussion

Westerners Reading Overseas History (graded)

Most people, most of the time, know their own national history better than they know that of other nations, even their neighboring nations. Even though we know our own history better than that of others, we often learned it during our secondary education through factual information about dates, places, and leading personalities.

The study of history is much more than memorizing sets of facts and inferences based on facts. The boundary of what constitutes history is a vague one, and it is driven by the broad or narrow viewpoint that is chosen by authors. Every author has a viewpoint, and the authors are motivated to research and write by considerations that are often not made known but which are operating nonetheless. The boundary also intersects a great many academic disciplines to establish the context in which the facts occur and the factors operate.

As viewpoints drive authors, so our own viewpoints drive our work as readers and discoverers. As people of “the West,” our perspective is limited by our own experience of living in our own time and place –limits known individually as persons, and collectively as citizens of nations. We discover just how foreign we are as Westerners when we venture across boundaries of time, distance, culture, and language to learn about what happened overseas. What a telling word “overseas” is!

So, let’s go on a treasure hunt.

What do we need to know that we do not (yet!) know in order to make progress as we begin our study of Vietnam and the 20th-century experience? What do we need to know and discover in order to analyze the history in an expansive sense of that part of Southeast Asia that became known as French Indochina a half century ago?

Having thought that through, go hunting to find those things and bring them back to class to tell your classmates about them.

This section lists options that can be used to view responses.

Rising Tide of Nationalist Expectations (graded)

The history and identity of the Vietnamese people reaches very far back. Their hopes and expectations for their own future do not just begin where our class textbook begins (at the end of World War II), nor do their often troubled relations with their neighbors in Southeast Asia.

For all the horrors of global warfare, World War II brought such disruption to world order that long-repressed hopes of colonized people found opportunity for new expression and leaders rose to the opportunities for change.

Our course is about the whole of 20th-century experience, with the Vietnam War being the centerpiece. For our discussion, let’s start here with TCO #4: How can we best understand how the agrarian Vietnamese people could come together during and after global warfare to restore their national identity and raise up leaders to meet their challenges?

Week 2 discussion

Failure of Diplomacy in 1954 (graded)

The readings and lecture have identified several formative activities that defined the American understanding of world history from 1946 to 1989 (and American activity during that period): Baruch’s labeling of world conflict as the Cold War in 1947, the Truman Doctrine of 1947, and Eisenhower’s figure of speech about falling dominoes.

As World War II began, the Vietminh formed as a guerilla army to resist French influence in the Vietnamese portion of Indochina. French respect for the Vietminh was so low that they called it “the barefoot army” – and yet the Vietminh organized over time to defeat much more sophisticated French forces by 1954 at Dien Bien Phu.

Let’s discuss how the operating assumptions of conflicting parties and other related nations prohibited constructive discussion at the Geneva Accords meetings of 1954 and brought about the continued failure of the diplomatic process to bring settlement in Vietnam.

From diplomatic effort in general and the 1954 Geneva negotiations in particular, what lessons can we learn about necessary conditions and understandings that are essential for conflict negotiations to succeed?

Issues of Collective Security (graded)

An antecedent to the world situation at the time of the Vietnam War was the first collective security agreement: the League of Nations (1919–1946). President Woodrow Wilson had broken new ground in international relations when he proposed the League of Nations concept in 1919 at the Treaty of Versailles negotiations that followed World War I – known at the time as The Great War. Other collective security agreements relating to the situation in Southeast Asia include the UN, Warsaw Pact, NATO, and SEATO. There were also other agreements elsewhere in the world. The United States was involved in the creation of all these agreements except the Warsaw Pact.

What were the purposes to be achieved in collective security agreements? What were the dangers to be avoided, and what were the fears?

And what was going on at their creation that made them differ so sharply in form, authority, decision-making ability, and military response capability? Our special concern is the case of SEATO. Treaties and alliances go back as far as written history will take us, but in the 20th century we start something altogether new with collective security agreements.

 

 

 

Week 3 discussion

Cold War Always Lurking (graded)

The Cold War ran from the end of World War II in 1945 to the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989. That is a lot of history, and a great many events occurred in the world during those 44 years. One of them, but only one of them, is the proxy war that we call the Vietnam War.

There was always a danger that a rather low-level proxy war could escalate and even rise to the level of nuclear confrontation and war. The dangers were perceived as great – that the Cold War could get hot and out of control.

To start, what other events of the Cold War years fit this idea of “proxy war?” What kind of steps did world leaders take to keep Cold War proxy wars from heating up? What were such leaders thinking?

Shifting from Advisors to Combatants (graded)

Not long before the Vietnam War is considered to have started – around the time period we focus on this class week, 1963 and 1964 – Dag Hammarskjøld of Sweden was serving as Secretary General of the United Nations. He is quoted to have said, “Peacekeeping is not a soldier’s job, but only a soldier can do it.” This quote is often the driving logic behind what came to be known as mlitary operations other than war.

With the years prior to this week’s discussions, American forces in southern Vietnam were relatively few and were called “advisors.” They brought American expertise with them for the purpose of training. From 1950 onward, the MAAG and later Special Forces trained Vietnamese forces to serve as a modern combatant force, but in this course week period, American forces moved beyond a partnership arrangement and took on direct combat roles.

Such a shift called for decisions at the highest levels. What can we learn about the minds and concerns of American senior leaders that allow for difficult decisions and commitments at such moments – what we might call “turning points?”

 

 

Week 4 discnn

Trying to Succeed in Limited War (graded)

Limited war as an ideology depended on a number of assumptions that limited what results could be achieved at the practical level.

The standing rules of engagement (ROE) were the practical expression of limited war ideology at the battlefield command and execution level. Think expansively and generatively about the impact of limited war ideology and then discuss these questions with other students:

• Within the concept of limited war, what would constitute the “winning” of the Vietnam War?

• What sort of successful outcomes would measure the win?

• How would we ever know if we had won it?

And then, what was the glue that held the lmited war concept together with all its difficulties of thought and application?

 

 

 

Formless” and “Frontless” Warfare (graded)

The Vietnam War was often described as a “formless war” and a “frontless war.” It resembled no other war in history as seen by military theorists and historians.

Thinking expansively, what sorts of assumptions needed to be made and what sorts of values had to be honored in order to make such a formless and frontless war even possible – let alone sustainable? Discuss that issue within our classroom to understand the impact of that situation fully before we discuss what sort of tactics could be effective there.

Be thinking ahead a few days as this discussion evolves; be clear in your mind what sort of activities are described by words such as “strategy,” “tactics,” “logistics,” and “attrition.”

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Read More

week 1 discussion Westerners Reading Overseas History (graded) Most people, most of the time, know their own national history better than they know that of other nations, even their neighboring nations. Even though we know our own history better than that of others, we often learned it during our secondary education through factual information about dates, places, and leading personalities. The study of history is much more than memorizing sets of facts and inferences based on facts. The boundary of what constitutes history is a vague one, and it is driven by the broad or narrow viewpoint that is chosen by authors. Every author has a viewpoint, and the authors are motivated to research and write by considerations that are often not made known but which are operating nonetheless. The boundary also intersects a great many academic disciplines to establish the context in which the facts occur and the factors operate. As viewpoints drive authors, so our own viewpoints drive our work as readers and discoverers. As people of “the West,” our perspective is limited by our own experience of living in our own time and place –limits known individually as persons, and collectively as citizens of nations. We discover just how foreign we are as Westerners when we venture across boundaries of time, distance, culture, and language to learn about what happened overseas. What a telling word “overseas” is! So, let’s go on a treasure hunt. What do we need to know that we do not (yet!) know in order to make progress as we begin our study of Vietnam and the 20th-century experience? What do we need to know and discover in order to analyze the history in an expansive sense of that part of Southeast Asia that became known as French Indochina a half century ago? Having thought that through, go hunting to find those things and bring them back to class to tell your classmates about them. This section lists options that can be used to view responses. Rising Tide of Nationalist Expectations (graded) The history and identity of the Vietnamese people reaches very far back. Their hopes and expectations for their own future do not just begin where our class textbook begins (at the end of World War II), nor do their often troubled relations with their neighbors in Southeast Asia. For all the horrors of global warfare, World War II brought such disruption to world order that long-repressed hopes of colonized people found opportunity for new expression and leaders rose to the opportunities for change. Our course is about the whole of 20th-century experience, with the Vietnam War being the centerpiece. For our discussion, let’s start here with TCO #4: How can we best understand how the agrarian Vietnamese people could come together during and after global warfare to restore their national identity and raise up leaders to meet their challenges? Week 2 discussion Failure of Diplomacy in 1954 (graded) The readings and lecture have identified several formative activities that defined the American understanding of world history from 1946 to 1989 (and American activity during that period): Baruch’s labeling of world conflict as the Cold War in 1947, the Truman Doctrine of 1947, and Eisenhower’s figure of speech about falling dominoes. As World War II began, the Vietminh formed as a guerilla army to resist French influence in the Vietnamese portion of Indochina. French respect for the Vietminh was so low that they called it “the barefoot army” – and yet the Vietminh organized over time to defeat much more sophisticated French forces by 1954 at Dien Bien Phu. Let’s discuss how the operating assumptions of conflicting parties and other related nations prohibited constructive discussion at the Geneva Accords meetings of 1954 and brought about the continued failure of the diplomatic process to bring settlement in Vietnam. From diplomatic effort in general and the 1954 Geneva negotiations in particular, what lessons can we learn about necessary conditions and understandings that are essential for conflict negotiations to succeed? Issues of Collective Security (graded) An antecedent to the world situation at the time of the Vietnam War was the first collective security agreement: the League of Nations (1919–1946). President Woodrow Wilson had broken new ground in international relations when he proposed the League of Nations concept in 1919 at the Treaty of Versailles negotiations that followed World War I – known at the time as The Great War. Other collective security agreements relating to the situation in Southeast Asia include the UN, Warsaw Pact, NATO, and SEATO. There were also other agreements elsewhere in the world. The United States was involved in the creation of all these agreements except the Warsaw Pact. What were the purposes to be achieved in collective security agreements? What were the dangers to be avoided, and what were the fears? And what was going on at their creation that made them differ so sharply in form, authority, decision-making ability, and military response capability? Our special concern is the case of SEATO. Treaties and alliances go back as far as written history will take us, but in the 20th century we start something altogether new with collective security agreements. Week 3 discussion Cold War Always Lurking (graded) The Cold War ran from the end of World War II in 1945 to the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989. That is a lot of history, and a great many events occurred in the world during those 44 years. One of them, but only one of them, is the proxy war that we call the Vietnam War. There was always a danger that a rather low-level proxy war could escalate and even rise to the level of nuclear confrontation and war. The dangers were perceived as great – that the Cold War could get hot and out of control. To start, what other events of the Cold War years fit this idea of “proxy war?” What kind of steps did world leaders take to keep Cold War proxy wars from heating up? What were such leaders thinking? Shifting from Advisors to Combatants (graded) Not long before the Vietnam War is considered to have started – around the time period we focus on this class week, 1963 and 1964 – Dag Hammarskjøld of Sweden was serving as Secretary General of the United Nations. He is quoted to have said, “Peacekeeping is not a soldier’s job, but only a soldier can do it.” This quote is often the driving logic behind what came to be known as mlitary operations other than war. With the years prior to this week’s discussions, American forces in southern Vietnam were relatively few and were called “advisors.” They brought American expertise with them for the purpose of training. From 1950 onward, the MAAG and later Special Forces trained Vietnamese forces to serve as a modern combatant force, but in this course week period, American forces moved beyond a partnership arrangement and took on direct combat roles. Such a shift called for decisions at the highest levels. What can we learn about the minds and concerns of American senior leaders that allow for difficult decisions and commitments at such moments – what we might call “turning points?” Week 4 discnn Trying to Succeed in Limited War (graded) Limited war as an ideology depended on a number of assumptions that limited what results could be achieved at the practical level. The standing rules of engagement (ROE) were the practical expression of limited war ideology at the battlefield command and execution level. Think expansively and generatively about the impact of limited war ideology and then discuss these questions with other students: • Within the concept of limited war, what would constitute the “winning” of the Vietnam War? • What sort of successful outcomes would measure the win? • How would we ever know if we had won it? And then, what was the glue that held the lmited war concept together with all its difficulties of thought and application? Formless” and “Frontless” Warfare (graded) The Vietnam War was often described as a “formless war” and a “frontless war.” It resembled no other war in history as seen by military theorists and historians. Thinking expansively, what sorts of assumptions needed to be made and what sorts of values had to be honored in order to make such a formless and frontless war even possible – let alone sustainable? Discuss that issue within our classroom to understand the impact of that situation fully before we discuss what sort of tactics could be effective there. Be thinking ahead a few days as this discussion evolves; be clear in your mind what sort of activities are described by words such as “strategy,” “tactics,” “logistics,” and “attrition.” Week 5 discnn Making Presidential Decisions (graded) President Harry Truman, the first Cold War President, had a sign on his desk saying “The Buck Stops Here.” The Webliography contains a link to the photo and story. Indecisive people can pass on their responsibilities and “pass the buck,” and advisory people can propose their concepts and lobby for acceptance, but the President can ultimately turn to nobody else. Presidents must make the hard decisions. It is a heavy mantle to bear on those presidential shoulders. It is lonely at the top. President Johnson’s “wise men” possessed depth in their areas of expertise beyond that of the President, who was a master mover of legislation to accomplish domestic social programs but very much out of his league in military matters and international relations. To begin, evaluate this question: To what extent was the March 1968 reevaluation of the Vietnam War, as a function of Cold War ideology, accomplished to satisfy domestic concerns rather than international concerns? In a time of mixed obligations, how can we differentiate what is domestic from what is international in American politics? Impact of News Photography (graded) When the dissolution of European colonialism began after World War II, the news media technology of the day was called a “newsreel.” To see the faces and hear the voices of world leaders and reports of events, you would watch one or two short films at the movie theaters along with the movie previews. These newsreels would be weeks or even months old, but they were the closest one could get to witnessing the events that we can see instantaneously on television today. If, as they say, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” then the photographs in newspapers and the filmed newsreels taught powerful lessons. Our textbook contains some powerful photographs that still rivet our attention today. • Page 68 Figure 3.1 – President Eisenhower greeting President Ngo Dinh Diem at Washington National Airport in 1957 • Page 105 Figure 4.3 – The Buddhist monk immolating himself on a Saigon street in 1963 • Page 232 Figure 8.5 – Brigadier General Nguyen Ngoc Loan executing a Viet Cong member on a Saigon street in 1968 • Page 340 Figure 12.2 – President Nixon greeting returning POW LCDR John McCain in 1973 Your assignment is to go on a field trip through the Internet and bring back two photographs for discussion of their impact: one from Vietnam activity (not necessarily combat-related) and one from any other source that you think made significant impact on the public. Be sure to give the URLs in your discussion post for others to go and see them. Then, with each one, write a paragraph about why that photo made significant impact on the public perception of events. Okay, off you go on your field trip. We will await your return. Week 6 discnnn How Diplomacy Involves Saving Face (graded) The class lectures and readings from Dr. Moss’ book speak about how presidents get personally invested in the results of their work, and how that investment impacts the decisions they make. Presidents do not, however, engage in diplomatic negotiations directly. They send ambassadors and negotiators who may be as senior as the Secretary of State, in the example of Dr. Henry Kissinger at the Paris Peace Talks. Diplomats also get personally involved. They get involved with their own desires for career success, as well as their desires for positive outcomes for their own countries. Doing poorly and conceding often requires that negotiators not be embarrassed; that is, that they “save face” for themselves personally and for their governments at home. Let’s start this discussion with the famous leaders mentioned so far in the course: In the Week 6 readings you see their own need to “save face” for themselves and their countries. What are some of the great examples shown so far of “saving face” on the part of diplomats? What does “saving face” mean in diplomatic situations? Welfare of Those Who Serve (graded) By 1968, over one million Americans were stationed outside the United States on their country’s business, wearing the uniform and trying to accomplish the missions of their commander-in-chief. Of that number, over a half million served in and near Vietnam, with that number capped at 549,500 in April 1968. Vietnam assignments “in country” were generally limited to thirteen months fixed duration. Service members reported in and departed individually on fixed departure dates called DEROS (date of rotation) rather than with their whole unit together. How can we assess the impact that deploying individually rather than by unit had on those who served those tours? How might that differ between those who had joined the Army voluntarily and those who had been conscripted for service by the Selective Service System? Week 7 discnn Coping with After-effects of Combat (graded) Everyone reacts to experiences, often for a lifetime. The scars of warfare are not all physical ones. The deepest scars are not seen; they are psychological and well hidden. People who live and work with combat veterans often cope with those effects also, because they relate to those veterans who struggle with their memories and harsh experiences. The Vietnam War differed from other wars, in that the experiences were highly individualized and personalized. Divisions and support units were deployed to Vietnam for many years, and individuals would transfer in and out for tours of specified length, most commonly for 13 months. They would fly in for transfer to replace somebody who had been there for 13 months, or who had been wounded or killed, and then fly out alone to other assignments at the end of their own tour. This system was very destructive to both unit integrity and personal welfare. Perhaps you are, or know some combat veterans from Vietnam. With great care to not violate the privacy of people or divulge their names, what can be understood and applied from the stories of those who served and left their commands and teams to return home individually, as opposed to the experiences of other war veterans? American Foreign Relations After the War (graded) Cold War ideology after World War II fostered the developing viewpoint that the American military was invincible, even as a viable and dangerous enemy worked toward global superiority: the Soviet Union. The practical application of this ideology was the policy of containing the expansionist intentions of global communism as attempted by the Soviet Union in locations of opportunity. The most notable of these proxy confrontations was the attempt to contain the communist threat in Vietnam– the subject of this course. President Nixon and Secretary of State Kissinger labored long and hard to achieve “peace with honor” and end American involvement in Southeast Asia in the Paris Accords of 1973. The failure of that peace to endure is the story that ends our course. Looking beyond the fall of Saigon in April 1975, we will consider how the domino theory ultimately proved false, as President Johnson had speculated: There was no global Communist surge of expansion, and the United States, with its NATO allies and its worldwide interests, did not collapse. How has American ability to act worldwide been affected by the fact that some of the most dire claims made in support of the war ultimately proved wrong? Homework 1 NOTE: The basic directions that apply to all the written assignments are available in Doc Sharing. Although the Viet people have a long history, our course begins in the 19th century with Vietnam as part of a larger area called French Indochina, a colony of France. The colonization took decades, but for our purposes the process of French control was complete in 1893. Many nations of historic significance matured to the point where they sent out colonial settlers to faraway lands and over time eventually extended dominion over those lands. The United States also came into possession of faraway territories but without the same process of sending talented citizens to those lands with an agenda of establishing domination over them or of establishing an empire. Your assignment is to write a short paper of two or three double-spaced pages on the topic listed below. Follow the directions carefully, and for this first week also explain carefully what you are saying. The Week 1 Topic: Explain why it is both necessary and helpful to study the context of prior history, especially the experiences of participants in that history, in order to understand what is valued by these participants. Also, what resources will be most helpful to you as a student of history? Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page. homework 2 NOTE: The basic directions that apply to all the written assignments are available in Doc Sharing. In a paper limited to three pages double-spaced, answer one of the following two questions: In the context of the Vietnamese society as the course has presented it through the online textbook so far, what evaluation can be made about the leadership styles and personal examples of Ho Chi Minh and Ngo Dinh Diem that would enable both of them to tap into the hearts and minds of the Vietnamese people and mobilize support for their initiatives? Why, in Vietnam, was personal leadership so very important? Refer to specific examples. Given the emerging role of the United States in mid-20th century world affairs as described on the online textbook, what evaluation can be made of the leadership styles Presidents Dwight Eisenhower and John Kennedy that made them effective or inhibited their effectiveness? Why in the United States is the direct leadership of the President so very important? Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page 3 NOTE: The basic directions that apply to all the written assignments are available in Doc Sharing. While history often appears to be a continuous stream of events and decisions, there are some that are so dramatic that historians sometimes call them “turning points.” Sometimes the term “tipping points” is also used. These are the moments when the whole future of events hangs in the balance. There were several such turning points in this week’s readings and discussions: the Buddhist riots of 1963, the coup d’etat against Diem in 1963, the assassination of President Kennedy in 1963, the attack on USS MADDOX in 1964, the Gulf of Tonkin Resolution of 1964, and the 1964 presidential elections. In a short paper of two pages double-spaced (maximum), take one of those turning points of your choice and write about it, answering these three questions: Why is your chosen turning point actually a turning point and not just another event? Why were the events immediately preceding the turning point necessary and essential in preparing for the turning point? What subsequent event or events were dependent on the action of the turning point; also, what possible event or events became impossible because the turning point occurred? Give your paper a filename that includes your name in this format: Homework 5 This is the first of two written assignments that will deal with the lessons to be learned from the American experience of the Vietnam War. This assignment deals specifically with military lessons learned. By your own orientation to cooperative work in a mission-driven organization like the armed forces, do you consider yourself to be a strategic thinker, a tactical planner, or a logistician? How do you determine that, and how does your own daily life and work demonstrate that? Then, with your own understanding of what cooperation and support you need from others involved, what do you need from others in their roles to accomplish your own work successfully? Finally, what strictly military lessons have you learned from the course so far that would help you accomplish your mission more effectively? Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page Homework6 This is the first of two written assignments that will 6deal with the lessons to be learned from the American experience of the Vietnam War. This assignment deals specifically with military lessons learned. By your own orientation to cooperative work in a mission-driven organization like the armed forces, do you consider yourself to be a strategic thinker, a tactical planner, or a logistician? How do you determine that, and how does your own daily life and work demonstrate that? Then, with your own understanding of what cooperation and support you need from others involved, what do you need from others in their roles to accomplish your own work successfully? Finally, what strictly military lessons have you learned from the course so far that would help you accomplish your mission more effectively? Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page

week 1 discussion

Westerners Reading Overseas History (graded)

Most people, most of the time, know their own national history better than they know that of other nations, even their neighboring nations. Even though we know our own history better than that of others, we often learned it during our secondary education through factual information about dates, places, and leading personalities.

The study of history is much more than memorizing sets of facts and inferences based on facts. The boundary of what constitutes history is a vague one, and it is driven by the broad or narrow viewpoint that is chosen by authors. Every author has a viewpoint, and the authors are motivated to research and write by considerations that are often not made known but which are operating nonetheless. The boundary also intersects a great many academic disciplines to establish the context in which the facts occur and the factors operate.

As viewpoints drive authors, so our own viewpoints drive our work as readers and discoverers. As people of “the West,” our perspective is limited by our own experience of living in our own time and place –limits known individually as persons, and collectively as citizens of nations. We discover just how foreign we are as Westerners when we venture across boundaries of time, distance, culture, and language to learn about what happened overseas. What a telling word “overseas” is!

So, let’s go on a treasure hunt.

What do we need to know that we do not (yet!) know in order to make progress as we begin our study of Vietnam and the 20th-century experience? What do we need to know and discover in order to analyze the history in an expansive sense of that part of Southeast Asia that became known as French Indochina a half century ago?

Having thought that through, go hunting to find those things and bring them back to class to tell your classmates about them.

This section lists options that can be used to view responses.

Rising Tide of Nationalist Expectations (graded)

The history and identity of the Vietnamese people reaches very far back. Their hopes and expectations for their own future do not just begin where our class textbook begins (at the end of World War II), nor do their often troubled relations with their neighbors in Southeast Asia.

For all the horrors of global warfare, World War II brought such disruption to world order that long-repressed hopes of colonized people found opportunity for new expression and leaders rose to the opportunities for change.

Our course is about the whole of 20th-century experience, with the Vietnam War being the centerpiece. For our discussion, let’s start here with TCO #4: How can we best understand how the agrarian Vietnamese people could come together during and after global warfare to restore their national identity and raise up leaders to meet their challenges?

 

Week 2 discussion

Failure of Diplomacy in 1954 (graded)

The readings and lecture have identified several formative activities that defined the American understanding of world history from 1946 to 1989 (and American activity during that period): Baruch’s labeling of world conflict as the Cold War in 1947, the Truman Doctrine of 1947, and Eisenhower’s figure of speech about falling dominoes.

As World War II began, the Vietminh formed as a guerilla army to resist French influence in the Vietnamese portion of Indochina. French respect for the Vietminh was so low that they called it “the barefoot army” – and yet the Vietminh organized over time to defeat much more sophisticated French forces by 1954 at Dien Bien Phu.

Let’s discuss how the operating assumptions of conflicting parties and other related nations prohibited constructive discussion at the Geneva Accords meetings of 1954 and brought about the continued failure of the diplomatic process to bring settlement in Vietnam.

From diplomatic effort in general and the 1954 Geneva negotiations in particular, what lessons can we learn about necessary conditions and understandings that are essential for conflict negotiations to succeed?

Issues of Collective Security (graded)

An antecedent to the world situation at the time of the Vietnam War was the first collective security agreement: the League of Nations (1919–1946). President Woodrow Wilson had broken new ground in international relations when he proposed the League of Nations concept in 1919 at the Treaty of Versailles negotiations that followed World War I – known at the time as The Great War. Other collective security agreements relating to the situation in Southeast Asia include the UN, Warsaw Pact, NATO, and SEATO. There were also other agreements elsewhere in the world. The United States was involved in the creation of all these agreements except the Warsaw Pact.

What were the purposes to be achieved in collective security agreements? What were the dangers to be avoided, and what were the fears?

And what was going on at their creation that made them differ so sharply in form, authority, decision-making ability, and military response capability? Our special concern is the case of SEATO. Treaties and alliances go back as far as written history will take us, but in the 20th century we start something altogether new with collective security agreements.

 

 

 

Week 3 discussion

Cold War Always Lurking (graded)

The Cold War ran from the end of World War II in 1945 to the fall of the Berlin Wall in 1989. That is a lot of history, and a great many events occurred in the world during those 44 years. One of them, but only one of them, is the proxy war that we call the Vietnam War.

There was always a danger that a rather low-level proxy war could escalate and even rise to the level of nuclear confrontation and war. The dangers were perceived as great – that the Cold War could get hot and out of control.

To start, what other events of the Cold War years fit this idea of “proxy war?” What kind of steps did world leaders take to keep Cold War proxy wars from heating up? What were such leaders thinking?

Shifting from Advisors to Combatants (graded)

Not long before the Vietnam War is considered to have started – around the time period we focus on this class week, 1963 and 1964 – Dag Hammarskjøld of Sweden was serving as Secretary General of the United Nations. He is quoted to have said, “Peacekeeping is not a soldier’s job, but only a soldier can do it.” This quote is often the driving logic behind what came to be known as mlitary operations other than war.

With the years prior to this week’s discussions, American forces in southern Vietnam were relatively few and were called “advisors.” They brought American expertise with them for the purpose of training. From 1950 onward, the MAAG and later Special Forces trained Vietnamese forces to serve as a modern combatant force, but in this course week period, American forces moved beyond a partnership arrangement and took on direct combat roles.

Such a shift called for decisions at the highest levels. What can we learn about the minds and concerns of American senior leaders that allow for difficult decisions and commitments at such moments – what we might call “turning points?”

 

Week 4 discnn

Trying to Succeed in Limited War (graded)

Limited war as an ideology depended on a number of assumptions that limited what results could be achieved at the practical level.

The standing rules of engagement (ROE) were the practical expression of limited war ideology at the battlefield command and execution level. Think expansively and generatively about the impact of limited war ideology and then discuss these questions with other students:

• Within the concept of limited war, what would constitute the “winning” of the Vietnam War?

• What sort of successful outcomes would measure the win?

• How would we ever know if we had won it?

And then, what was the glue that held the lmited war concept together with all its difficulties of thought and application?

 

 

 

Formless” and “Frontless” Warfare (graded)

The Vietnam War was often described as a “formless war” and a “frontless war.” It resembled no other war in history as seen by military theorists and historians.

Thinking expansively, what sorts of assumptions needed to be made and what sorts of values had to be honored in order to make such a formless and frontless war even possible – let alone sustainable? Discuss that issue within our classroom to understand the impact of that situation fully before we discuss what sort of tactics could be effective there.

Be thinking ahead a few days as this discussion evolves; be clear in your mind what sort of activities are described by words such as “strategy,” “tactics,” “logistics,” and “attrition.”

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Week 5 discnn

Making Presidential Decisions (graded)

President Harry Truman, the first Cold War President, had a sign on his desk saying “The Buck Stops Here.” The Webliography contains a link to the photo and story. Indecisive people can pass on their responsibilities and “pass the buck,” and advisory people can propose their concepts and lobby for acceptance, but the President can ultimately turn to nobody else. Presidents must make the hard decisions. It is a heavy mantle to bear on those presidential shoulders. It is lonely at the top.

President Johnson’s “wise men” possessed depth in their areas of expertise beyond that of the President, who was a master mover of legislation to accomplish domestic social programs but very much out of his league in military matters and international relations.

To begin, evaluate this question: To what extent was the March 1968 reevaluation of the Vietnam War, as a function of Cold War ideology, accomplished to satisfy domestic concerns rather than international concerns? In a time of mixed obligations, how can we differentiate what is domestic from what is international in American politics?


Impact of News Photography (graded)

When the dissolution of European colonialism began after World War II, the news media technology of the day was called a “newsreel.” To see the faces and hear the voices of world leaders and reports of events, you would watch one or two short films at the movie theaters along with the movie previews. These newsreels would be weeks or even months old, but they were the closest one could get to witnessing the events that we can see instantaneously on television today. If, as they say, “a picture is worth a thousand words,” then the photographs in newspapers and the filmed newsreels taught powerful lessons. Our textbook contains some powerful photographs that still rivet our attention today.

• Page 68 Figure 3.1 – President Eisenhower greeting President Ngo Dinh Diem at Washington National Airport in 1957
• Page 105 Figure 4.3 – The Buddhist monk immolating himself on a Saigon street in 1963
• Page 232 Figure 8.5 – Brigadier General Nguyen Ngoc Loan executing a Viet Cong member on a Saigon street in 1968
• Page 340 Figure 12.2 – President Nixon greeting returning POW LCDR John McCain in 1973

Your assignment is to go on a field trip through the Internet and bring back two photographs for discussion of their impact: one from Vietnam activity (not necessarily combat-related) and one from any other source that you think made significant impact on the public. Be sure to give the URLs in your discussion post for others to go and see them. Then, with each one, write a paragraph about why that photo made significant impact on the public perception of events. Okay, off you go on your field trip. We will await your return.

 

 

 

 

 

 

Week 6 discnnn


How Diplomacy Involves Saving Face (graded)

The class lectures and readings from Dr. Moss’ book speak about how presidents get personally invested in the results of their work, and how that investment impacts the decisions they make. Presidents do not, however, engage in diplomatic negotiations directly. They send ambassadors and negotiators who may be as senior as the Secretary of State, in the example of Dr. Henry Kissinger at the Paris Peace Talks. Diplomats also get personally involved. They get involved with their own desires for career success, as well as their desires for positive outcomes for their own countries. Doing poorly and conceding often requires that negotiators not be embarrassed; that is, that they “save face” for themselves personally and for their governments at home. Let’s start this discussion with the famous leaders mentioned so far in the course: In the Week 6 readings you see their own need to “save face” for themselves and their countries. What are some of the great examples shown so far of “saving face” on the part of diplomats? What does “saving face” mean in diplomatic situations?

 

 

 

Welfare of Those Who Serve (graded)

By 1968, over one million Americans were stationed outside the United States on their country’s business, wearing the uniform and trying to accomplish the missions of their commander-in-chief. Of that number, over a half million served in and near Vietnam, with that number capped at 549,500 in April 1968.

Vietnam assignments “in country” were generally limited to thirteen months fixed duration. Service members reported in and departed individually on fixed departure dates called DEROS (date of rotation) rather than with their whole unit together.

How can we assess the impact that deploying individually rather than by unit had on those who served those tours? How might that differ between those who had joined the Army voluntarily and those who had been conscripted for service by the Selective Service System?

 

 

 

 

Week 7 discnn

Coping with After-effects of Combat (graded)

Everyone reacts to experiences, often for a lifetime. The scars of warfare are not all physical ones. The deepest scars are not seen; they are psychological and well hidden. People who live and work with combat veterans often cope with those effects also, because they relate to those veterans who struggle with their memories and harsh experiences. The Vietnam War differed from other wars, in that the experiences were highly individualized and personalized. Divisions and support units were deployed to Vietnam for many years, and individuals would transfer in and out for tours of specified length, most commonly for 13 months. They would fly in for transfer to replace somebody who had been there for 13 months, or who had been wounded or killed, and then fly out alone to other assignments at the end of their own tour. This system was very destructive to both unit integrity and personal welfare. Perhaps you are, or know some combat veterans from Vietnam. With great care to not violate the privacy of people or divulge their names, what can be understood and applied from the stories of those who served and left their commands and teams to return home individually, as opposed to the experiences of other war veterans?

American Foreign Relations After the War (graded)

Cold War ideology after World War II fostered the developing viewpoint that the American military was invincible, even as a viable and dangerous enemy worked toward global superiority: the Soviet Union.

The practical application of this ideology was the policy of containing the expansionist intentions of global communism as attempted by the Soviet Union in locations of opportunity. The most notable of these proxy confrontations was the attempt to contain the communist threat in Vietnam– the subject of this course.

President Nixon and Secretary of State Kissinger labored long and hard to achieve “peace with honor” and end American involvement in Southeast Asia in the Paris Accords of 1973. The failure of that peace to endure is the story that ends our course.

Looking beyond the fall of Saigon in April 1975, we will consider how the domino theory ultimately proved false, as President Johnson had speculated: There was no global Communist surge of expansion, and the United States, with its NATO allies and its worldwide interests, did not collapse. How has American ability to act worldwide been affected by the fact that some of the most dire claims made in support of the war ultimately proved wrong?

 

 

Homework 1

NOTE: The basic directions that apply to all the written assignments are available in Doc Sharing.

Although the Viet people have a long history, our course begins in the 19th century with Vietnam as part of a larger area called French Indochina, a colony of France. The colonization took decades, but for our purposes the process of French control was complete in 1893.

Many nations of historic significance matured to the point where they sent out colonial settlers to faraway lands and over time eventually extended dominion over those lands. The United States also came into possession of faraway territories but without the same process of sending talented citizens to those lands with an agenda of establishing domination over them or of establishing an empire.

Your assignment is to write a short paper of two or three double-spaced pages on the topic listed below. Follow the directions carefully, and for this first week also explain carefully what you are saying.

The Week 1 Topic: Explain why it is both necessary and helpful to study the context of prior history, especially the experiences of participants in that history, in order to understand what is valued by these participants. Also, what resources will be most helpful to you as a student of history?

Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page.

homework 2

NOTE: The basic directions that apply to all the written assignments are available in Doc Sharing.

In a paper limited to three pages double-spaced, answer one of the following two questions:

  1. In the context of the Vietnamese society as the course has presented it through the online textbook so far, what evaluation can be made about the leadership styles and personal examples of Ho Chi Minh and Ngo Dinh Diem that would enable both of them to tap into the hearts and minds of the Vietnamese people and mobilize support for their initiatives? Why, in Vietnam, was personal leadership so very important? Refer to specific examples.
  2. Given the emerging role of the United States in mid-20th century world affairs as described on the online textbook, what evaluation can be made of the leadership styles Presidents Dwight Eisenhower and John Kennedy that made them effective or inhibited their effectiveness? Why in the United States is the direct leadership of the President so very important?

Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page

3

 

NOTE: The basic directions that apply to all the written assignments are available in Doc Sharing.

While history often appears to be a continuous stream of events and decisions, there are some that are so dramatic that historians sometimes call them “turning points.” Sometimes the term “tipping points” is also used. These are the moments when the whole future of events hangs in the balance.

There were several such turning points in this week’s readings and discussions: the Buddhist riots of 1963, the coup d’etat against Diem in 1963, the assassination of President Kennedy in 1963, the attack on USS MADDOX in 1964, the Gulf of Tonkin Resolution of 1964, and the 1964 presidential elections.

In a short paper of two pages double-spaced (maximum), take one of those turning points of your choice and write about it, answering these three questions:

  1. Why is your chosen turning point actually a turning point and not just another event?
  2. Why were the events immediately preceding the turning point necessary and essential in preparing for the turning point?
  3. What subsequent event or events were dependent on the action of the turning point; also, what possible event or events became impossible because the turning point occurred?

Give your paper a filename that includes your name in this format:

 

Homework 5

This is the first of two written assignments that will deal with the lessons to be learned from the American experience of the Vietnam War. This assignment deals specifically with military lessons learned.

By your own orientation to cooperative work in a mission-driven organization like the armed forces, do you consider yourself to be a strategic thinker, a tactical planner, or a logistician? How do you determine that, and how does your own daily life and work demonstrate that?

Then, with your own understanding of what cooperation and support you need from others involved, what do you need from others in their roles to accomplish your own work successfully?

Finally, what strictly military lessons have you learned from the course so far that would help you accomplish your mission more effectively?

Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page

 

 

 

 

 

Homework6

This is the first of two written assignments that will 6deal with the lessons to be learned from the American experience of the Vietnam War. This assignment deals specifically with military lessons learned.

By your own orientation to cooperative work in a mission-driven organization like the armed forces, do you consider yourself to be a strategic thinker, a tactical planner, or a logistician? How do you determine that, and how does your own daily life and work demonstrate that?

Then, with your own understanding of what cooperation and support you need from others involved, what do you need from others in their roles to accomplish your own work successfully?

Finally, what strictly military lessons have you learned from the course so far that would help you accomplish your mission more effectively?

Submit your assignment to the Dropbox located on the silver tab at the top of this page

 

 

 

 

 

Read More

PCB Corporation manufactures a single product. Monthly production costs incurred in the manufacturing process are shown below for the production of 3,870 units. The utilities and maintenance costs are mixed costs. The fixed portions of these costs are $387 and $258, respectively. Production in Units 3,870 Production Costs Direct materials $9,675 Direct labor 19,350 Utilities 2,322 Property taxes 1,290 Indirect labor 5,805 Supervisory salaries 2,322 Maintenance 1,419 Depreciation 3,096 Your answer is correct. Identify the above costs as variable, fixed, or mixed. Cost Direct materials Direct labor Utilities Property taxes Indirect \labor Supervisory salaries Maintenance Depreciation Calculate variable costs per unit, variable cost per unit for utilities and variable cost per unit for maintenance. Exclude mixed costs in the calculation for variable cost per unit. (Round answers to 2 decimal places e.g. 2.25.) Variable cost per unit (Exclude variable cost for utilities and maintenance) $ Variable cost per unit for utilities $ Variable cost per unit for maintenance $

PCB Corporation manufactures a single product. Monthly production costs incurred in the manufacturing process are shown below for the production of 3,870 units. The utilities and maintenance costs are mixed costs. The fixed portions of these costs are $387 and $258, respectively. Production in Units 3,870 Production Costs Direct materials $9,675 Direct labor 19,350 Utilities 2,322 Property taxes 1,290 Indirect labor 5,805 Supervisory salaries 2,322 Maintenance 1,419 Depreciation 3,096 Your answer is correct.

 
 Identify the above costs as variable, fixed, or mixed. Cost Direct materials  
 Direct labor Utilities
 Property taxes Indirect 
\labor Supervisory salaries
 Maintenance
Depreciation
 
 Calculate variable costs per unit, variable cost per unit for utilities and variable cost per unit for maintenance. Exclude mixed costs in the calculation for variable cost per unit. (Round answers to 2 decimal places e.g. 2.25.) Variable cost per unit (Exclude variable cost for utilities and maintenance) $ Variable cost per unit for utilities $ Variable cost per unit for maintenance $

Read More

For this week’s hands-on assignment, we are going to construct a research proposal for our persuasive research paper. You may use the attached template to write your proposal. You may add more supporting and opposing arguments or support points, but you may not subtract from the template, as the template reflects the minimum amount of supporting evidence necessary for our paper. The final paper will eventually be 4-5 double-spaced pages of text, not including the title page and reference page (In other words, the grand total will be 6-8 pages). You should plan accordingly to have enough research information and support points to fulfill this page requirement. This research proposal should only be 1-2 pages long. On your proposal, you may use direct quotes, paraphrases and summaries for your support points, but they must include an in-text citation, and quotes must be in quotation marks. You do not have to have full research done at this time and you may, if you like, only include your own rational arguments for which you will find support later. Remember that your supporting arguments will support your thesis. In other words, your supporting arguments will explain why your thesis should be believed. The opposing arguments should represent opposing perspectives or questions that you expect your skeptical audience to have about your thesis. In other words, your opposing arguments are reasons that your thesis should NOT be believed. The replies to those opposing arguments are how you would fend off that skepticism, point by point Other Requirements: the text book for this class is In Wyrick’s Steps to Writing Well, (8th Ed.): pp. 371-392. please if any in text citation is done please put in ” ” and mark it. I will APA format it the title of the thesis is “Should high school athletes be tested for drugs?”

For this week’s hands-on assignment, we are going to construct a research proposal for our persuasive research paper. You may use the attached template to write your proposal. You may add more supporting and opposing arguments or support points, but you may not subtract from the template, as the template reflects the minimum amount of supporting evidence necessary for our paper.

The final paper will eventually be 4-5 double-spaced pages of text, not including the title page and reference page (In other words, the grand total will be 6-8 pages). You should plan accordingly to have enough research information and support points to fulfill this page requirement. This research proposal should only be 1-2 pages long.

On your proposal, you may use direct quotes, paraphrases and summaries for your support points, but they must include an in-text citation, and quotes must be in quotation marks. You do not have to have full research done at this time and you may, if you like, only include your own rational arguments for which you will find support later.

Remember that your supporting arguments will support your thesis. In other words, your supporting arguments will explain why your thesis should be believed. The opposing arguments should represent opposing perspectives or questions that you expect your skeptical audience to have about your thesis. In other words, your opposing arguments are reasons that your thesis should NOT be believed. The replies to those opposing arguments are how you would fend off that skepticism, point by point

Other Requirements: the text book for this class is In Wyrick’s Steps to Writing Well, (8th Ed.): pp. 371-392. please if any in text citation is done please put in ” ” and mark it. I will APA format it the title of the thesis is “Should high school athletes be tested for drugs?”

Read More

Westion’s employees prepare their time cards in the company’s online timesheet system. A designated time keeper in each department approves the timesheets in the system and notifies the payroll department. There the payroll clerk runs the payroll and the systems calculates each employee’s gross and net pay based on hours worked and information contained in the employee master file that includes pay rates, withholding information and tax tables. The payroll clerk then reviews the paycheck summary, processes any corrections and runs the final payroll. Depending on an employee’s preference, physical checks or direct deposits stubs are prepared. An original of the final payroll summary is kept in the payroll department. A copy of the payroll summary and of the physical checks and direct deposit stubs are sent to the cash disbursement department. The cash disbursements clerk reconciles the payroll summary with the paychecks and direct deposits and records the transaction in the cash disbursements journal. The cash disbursements clerk sends the paychecks and direct deposit stubs to the treasurer for signing and processing. The signed checks and direct deposits stubs are sent to the paymaster who distributes them the employees by 11AM on payday. For the accounting process described, prepare a data flow diagram entity relationship diagram systems flowchart Note: diagrams must be original, not screenshots, that you have created yourself in MS word, Excel, Visio, or an online product that I can access with your login. Additional Requirements

Westion’s employees prepare their time cards in the company’s online timesheet system. A designated time keeper in each department approves the timesheets in the system and notifies the payroll department. There the payroll clerk runs the payroll and the systems calculates each employee’s gross and net pay based on hours worked and information contained in the employee master file that includes pay rates, withholding information and tax tables. The payroll clerk then reviews the paycheck summary, processes any corrections and runs the final payroll. Depending on an employee’s preference, physical checks or direct deposits stubs are prepared. An original of the final payroll summary is kept in the payroll department.

A copy of the payroll summary and of the physical checks and direct deposit stubs are sent to the cash disbursement department. The cash disbursements clerk reconciles the payroll summary with the paychecks and direct deposits and records the transaction in the cash disbursements journal. The cash disbursements clerk sends the paychecks and direct deposit stubs to the treasurer for signing and processing. The signed checks and direct deposits stubs are sent to the paymaster who distributes them the employees by 11AM on payday.

For the accounting process described, prepare a

data flow diagram
entity relationship diagram
systems flowchart

Note: diagrams must be original, not screenshots, that you have created yourself in MS word, Excel, Visio, or an online product that I can access with your login.

Additional Requirements

Read More

Clean sweep company produces all-vinyl mats. Each doormat calls for .5 meter of vinyl material. The material should cost $3 per meter. Standard direct labor hours and labor cost per doormat are .3 hour and $6 (.3 X$20 per hour). Currently the standard variable overhead rate is $1.5 per direct labor hour, and its standard fixed overhead rate is .8 per direct labor hour. In August, the division manufactured and sold 50,000 doormats. Duing the month, it used 25,200 meters of vinyl material; the total cost of the material was $73,080. The total overhead costs for August were $28,200, of which $18,200 was variable. The total number of direct labor hours worked was 10,800 and the factory payroll for direct labor for the month was $214,920. Budgeted fixed overhead for August was $9,280. Normal monthly capacity for the year was set at 58,000 doormats.

Clean sweep company produces all-vinyl mats. Each doormat calls for .5 meter of vinyl material. The material should cost $3 per meter. Standard direct labor hours and labor cost per doormat are .3 hour and $6 (.3 X$20 per hour). Currently the standard variable overhead rate is $1.5 per direct labor hour, and its standard fixed overhead rate is .8 per direct labor hour.
In August, the division manufactured and sold 50,000 doormats. Duing the month, it used 25,200 meters of vinyl material; the total cost of the material was $73,080. The total overhead costs for August were $28,200, of which $18,200 was variable. The total number of direct labor hours worked was 10,800 and the factory payroll for direct labor for the month was $214,920. Budgeted fixed overhead for August was $9,280. Normal monthly capacity for the year was set at 58,000 doormats.

Read More

Please read case and then answer three questions. Garden State Container Corporation, Financial Analysis Forecasting, Case 36, Directed Garden State Container Corporation manufactures boxes and other containers primarily for farm products. More than 85 percent of the company’s sales come from the northeastern part of the United States, especially Pennsylvania, New Jersey, New York, and Maryland, although the company’s patented egg cartons are distributed throughout the United States. Jim Jackson, the founder and president, recently received a call from Martha Menendez, vice president of Atlanta First National Bank. Menendez told him that a negative report had been generated by the bank’s computerized analysis system; the report showed that Garden State’s financial position was bad and getting worse. The bank requires quarterly financial statements from each of its major loan customers. Information from these statements is fed into the computer, which then calculates key ratios for each customer and charts trends in these ratios. The system also compares the statistics for each company with the average ratios of other firms in the same industry and against any protective covenants in the loan agreements. If any ratio is significantly worse than the industry average, reflects a marked adverse trend, or fails to meet contractual requirements, the computer highlights the deficiency. The latest report on Garden State revealed a number of adverse trends and several potentially serious. Particularly disturbing were the 1992 current, quick, and debt ratios, all of which failed to meet the contractual limits of 2.0, 1.0, and 55 percent, respectively. Technically, the bank had a legal right to call all the loans it had extended to Garden State for immediate repayment and, if the loans were not repaid within ten days, to force the company into bankruptcy. Martha hoped to avoid calling the loans if at all possible, as she knew this would back Garden State into a corner from which it might not be able to emerge. Still, her own bank’s examiners had recently become highly sensitive to the issue of problem loans, because the recent spate of bank failures had forced regulators to become more strict in their examination of bank loan portfolios and to demand earlier identification of potential repayment problems. One measure of the quality of a loan is the Altman Z score, which for Garden State was 3.04 for 1992, slightly below the 3.20 minimum that Martha’s bank uses to differentiate strong firms with little likelihood of bankruptcy in the next two years from those deemed likely to go into default. This will put the bank under increased pressure to reclassify Garden State’s loans as “problem loans,” to set up a reserve to cover potential losses, and to take whatever steps are necessary to reduce the bank’s exposure. Setting up the loss reserve would have a negative effect on the bank’s profits and reflect badly on Martha’s performance. To keep Garden State’s loan from being reclassified as a “problem loan,” the Senior Loan Committee will require strong and convincing evidence that the company’s present difficulties are only temporary. Therefore, it must be shown that appropriate actions to overcome the problems have been taken and that the chances of reversing the adverse trends are realistically good. Martha now has the task of collecting the necessary information, evaluating its implications, and preparing a recommendation for action. The recession that plagued the U.S. economy in the early 1900s caused severe, though hopefully temporary, problems for companies like Garden State. On top of this, disastrous droughts for two straight summers had devastated vegetable crops in the area, leading to a drastic curtailment of demand for produce shipping containers. In light of the softening demand, Garden State had aggressively reduced prices in 1991 and 1992 to stimulate sales. Higher sales, the company believed, would allow it to realize greater economies of scale in production and to ride the learning, or experience, curve down to a lower cost position. Garden State’s management had full confidence that normal weather and national economic policies would revive the ailing economy and that the downturn in demand would be only a short-term problem. Consequently, production continued unabated, and inventories increased sharply. In a further effort to reduce inventory, Garden State relaxed its credit standards in early 1992 and improved its already favorable credit terms. As a result, sales growth did remain high by industry standards through the third quarter of 1992, but not high enough to keep inventories from continuing to rise. Further, the credit policy changes had caused accounts receivable to increase dramatically by late 1992. To finance its rising inventories and receivables, Garden State turned to the bank for a long-term loan in 1991 and also increased its short-term credit lines in both 1991 and 1992. However, this expanded credit was insufficient to cover the asset expansion, so the company began to delay payments of its accounts payable until the second late notice had been received. Management realized that this was not a particularly wise decision for the long run, but they did not think it would be necessary to follow the policy for very long – the 1992 summer vegetable crop looked like a record breaker, and it was unlikely that a severe drought would pull out of the weak growth scenario in late 1992. Thus, the company was optimistic that its stable and profitable markets of the past would soon reappear. After Martha’s telephone call, and the subsequent receipt of copy of the bank’s financial analysis of Garden State, Jim began to realize just how precarious his company’s financial position had become. As he started to reflect on what could be done to correct the problems, it suddenly to reflect on what could be done to correct the problems, it the bank imagined. Jim had recently signed a firm contract for a plant expansion that would require an additional $12,750,000 of capital during the first quarter of 1993, and he had planned to obtain this money with a short –term loan from the bank to be repaid from profits expected in the last half of 1993 as a result of the expansion. In his view, once the new production facility went on line, the company would be able to increase output in several segments of the shipping container market. It might have been possible to cut back on the expansion plans and to retrench, but because of the signed construction contracts and the cancellation charges that would be imposed if the plans were canceled, Jim correctly regards the $12,750,000 of new capital as being essential for Garden State’s very survival. Jim quickly called his senior management team in for a meeting, explained the situation and asked for their help in formulating a solution. The group concluded that if the company’s current business plan were carried out, Garden State’s sales would grow by 10 percent from 1992 to 1993 and by another 15 percent from 1993 to 1994. Further, they concluded that Garden State should reverse its recent policy of aggressive pricing and easy credit, returning to pricing that fully covered costs plus normal profit margins and to standard industry credit practices. These changes should enable the company to reduce the cost of goods sold from over 85 percent of sales in 1992 to 8 percent in 1993 and then to 7.5 percent in 1994. Significant cuts should also be possible in miscellaneous expenses, which should fall from 2.92 percent of 1992 sales to approximately 1.75 percent of sales in 1993 and to 1.25 percent in 1994. These cost reductions represented “trimming the fat,” so they were not expected to degrade the quality of the firm’s products or the effectiveness of its sales efforts. Further, to appease suppliers, future bills would be paid more promptly, and to convince the bank how serious management is about correcting the company’s problems, cash dividends would be eliminated until the firm regains its financial health. Assume that Jim has hired you as a consultant to first verify the bank’s evaluation of the company’s current financial situation and then put together a forecast of Garden State’s expected performance for 1993 and 1994. Jim asks you to develop some figures that ignore the possibility of a reduction in credit lines and that assume the bank will increase the line of credit by the $12,750,000 needed for the expansion and supporting working capital. Also, you and Jim do not expect the level of interest rates to change substantially over the two-year forecast period; however, you both think that the bank will charge 12 percent on both the additional short-term loan, if it is granted, and on the existing short-term loans, if they are extended. The assumed 40 percent combined federal and state tax rate should also hold for two years. Finally, if the bank cooperates, and if Jim is able to turn the company around, the P/E ratio should be 12 in 1993 and should rise to 14 in 1994. Questions 1. Complete the 1992 columns of Tables 3 through 6, disregarding for now the projected data in the 1993 and 1994 columns. If you are using the Lotus model, use it to complete the tables. Be sure you understand all the numbers, as it would be most embarrassing if you were asked how you got a particular number, and could not give a meaningful response. 2. Based on the information in the case and on the results of your calculations in Question 1. prepare a list of Garden State’s strengths and weaknesses. In essence, you should look at the common-sized statements and each group of key ratios (for example, the liquidity ratios) and see what those ratios indicate about the company’s operations and financial condition. As part of your answer, use the extended Du Pont equation to highlight the key relationships. 3. Recognizing that you might want to revive your opinion later, does it appear, based on your analysis to this point, that the bank should lend the requested money to Garden State? Explain. Table 3 Common-Sized Balance Sheets for Years Ended December 31 1990 1991 1992 Assets: Cash and marketable securities 8.82% 5.13% 3.37% Accounts receivable 30.39 25.72 x Inventory 35.36 48.32 50.39 Current Assets 74.55% 79.18% x Land, buildings, plant, and equipment 30.78% 27.31% x Accumulated depreciation -5.32% -6.48% -6.88 Net fixed assets 25.45% 20.82% 16.05% Total assets 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% Table 4 Common-Size Income Statements for Years Ended December 31 1990 1991 1992 Net sales 100.00% 100.00% 100.00% Cost of goods sold 80.52 82.18 x Gross profit 19.48% 17.82% 14.76% Admin & selling expenses 7.30% 8.11% 8.41% Depreciation 0.91 0.88% x Miscellaneaous expenses 1.16% 1.88% 2.85% Total operating expenses 9.36% 10.86% 2.28% EBIT 10.12% 6.95% 2.48% Interest on short-term loans 0.18% 0.30% x Interest on long term loans 0.38% 0.53% x Interest on mortgage 0.15% 0.12% 0.10% Total interest 0.71% 0.95% 1.51% Before tax earnings 9.41% 6.00% 0.96% Taxes 3.76% 2.40% x Net income 5.64% 3.60% 0.58% Dividends on stock 1.41% 0.90% 0.14% Additions to retained earnings 4.23% 2.70% 0.43% Table 5 Statement of Cash Flows for Years Ended December 31 1991 1992 Cash Flows from Operations Sales $378,549 $401,251 Increase in receivables -2,728 x Cash sales $375,821 $379,461 Cost of goods sold ($311,110) -342,016 Increase in inventories ($29,570) -28,623 Increase in accts payable $7,484 18,984 Increase in accruals $3,314 x Cash cost of goods ($329,882) x Cash margin $45,939 x Admin & selling expenses ($30,690) ($33,762) Miscellaneous expenses ($7,114) ($11,450) Taxes ($9,088) ($1,547) Net Cash Flow from operations ($953) x Cash Flow from Fixed Asset Investment: Investment in fixed assets ($4,561) ($5,409) Cash Flow from Financing Activities: Increase in short term debt $3,824 $26,266 Increase in long term debt 6,694 x Repayment of mortgage ($536) ($522) Interest expense ($3,598) ($6,076) Common dividends ($3,408) ($580) Net Cash Flow from financing activities $2,976 $19,088 Increase (decrease) in cash and marketable securities ($2,539) x Table 6 Historical and Pro Forma Ratio Analysis for Years Ended December 31 Pro Forma Industry 1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 Average Liquidity Ratios: Current ratio 3.13 2.74 x x x 2.5 Quick ratio 1.65 1.07 0.72 1.13 x 1.00 Leverage Ratios: Debt ratio 40.80% 46.47% x x 52.31% 50.00% TIE coverage 14.23 7.31 1.64 x 6.55 7.7 Asset Management Ratios: Inventory turnover (cost)a 7.09 4.49 3.49 5.70 5.70 5.70 Inventory turnover (sale)b 8.81 5.46 4.10 x x 7.00 Fixed asset turnover 12.24 12.67 12.85 11.38 13.77 12.00 Total asset turnover 3.12 2.64 x 2.05 x 3.00 Days sale outstanding (ACP)c 35.12 35.11 52.68 x 32.00 32.00 Profitability Ratios: Profit margin 5.64% 3.60% 0.58% x x 2.90% Gross profit margin 19.48% 17.82% 14.76% 17.50% 20.00% 18.00% Return on total assets 17.58% 9.50% x 5.90% 10.94% 8.80% ROE 29.70% 17.74% 2.95% x x 17.50% Other Ratios: Altman Z scored 6.64 4.75 x 3.95 5.42 4.65 Payout ratio 25.00% 25.00% 25.00% 0.00% x 20.00%

Please read case and then answer three questions.
Garden State Container Corporation, Financial Analysis Forecasting, Case 36, Directed
Garden State Container Corporation manufactures boxes and other containers primarily for farm products. More than 85 percent of the company’s sales come from the northeastern part of the United States, especially Pennsylvania, New Jersey, New York, and Maryland, although the company’s patented egg cartons are distributed throughout the United States. Jim Jackson, the founder and president, recently received a call from Martha Menendez, vice president of Atlanta First National Bank. Menendez told him that a negative report had been generated by the bank’s computerized analysis system; the report showed that Garden State’s financial position was bad and getting worse.
The bank requires quarterly financial statements from each of its major loan customers. Information from these statements is fed into the computer, which then calculates key ratios for each customer and charts trends in these ratios. The system also compares the statistics for each company with the average ratios of other firms in the same industry and against any protective covenants in the loan agreements. If any ratio is significantly worse than the industry average, reflects a marked adverse trend, or fails to meet contractual requirements, the computer highlights the deficiency.
The latest report on Garden State revealed a number of adverse trends and several potentially serious. Particularly disturbing were the 1992 current, quick, and debt ratios, all of which failed to meet the contractual limits of 2.0, 1.0, and 55 percent, respectively. Technically, the bank had a legal right to call all the loans it had extended to Garden State for immediate repayment and, if the loans were not repaid within ten days, to force the company into bankruptcy.
Martha hoped to avoid calling the loans if at all possible, as she knew this would back Garden State into a corner from which it might not be able to emerge. Still, her own bank’s examiners had recently become highly sensitive to the issue of problem loans, because the recent spate of bank failures had forced regulators to become more strict in their examination of bank loan portfolios and to demand earlier identification of potential repayment problems.
One measure of the quality of a loan is the Altman Z score, which for Garden State was 3.04 for 1992, slightly below the 3.20 minimum that Martha’s bank uses to differentiate strong firms with little likelihood of bankruptcy in the next two years from those deemed likely to go into default. This will put the bank under increased pressure to reclassify Garden State’s loans as “problem loans,” to set up a reserve to cover potential losses, and to take whatever steps are necessary to reduce the bank’s exposure. Setting up the loss reserve would have a negative effect on the bank’s profits and reflect badly on Martha’s performance.
To keep Garden State’s loan from being reclassified as a “problem loan,” the Senior Loan Committee will require strong and convincing evidence that the company’s present difficulties are only temporary. Therefore, it must be shown that appropriate actions to overcome the problems have been taken and that the chances of reversing the adverse trends are realistically good. Martha now has the task of collecting the necessary information, evaluating its implications, and preparing a recommendation for action.
The recession that plagued the U.S. economy in the early 1900s caused severe, though hopefully temporary, problems for companies like Garden State. On top of this, disastrous droughts for two straight summers had devastated vegetable crops in the area, leading to a drastic curtailment of demand for produce shipping containers. In light of the softening demand, Garden State had aggressively reduced prices in 1991 and 1992 to stimulate sales. Higher sales, the company believed, would allow it to realize greater economies of scale in production and to ride the learning, or experience, curve down to a lower cost position. Garden State’s management had full confidence that normal weather and national economic policies would revive the ailing economy and that the downturn in demand would be only a short-term problem. Consequently, production continued unabated, and inventories increased sharply.
In a further effort to reduce inventory, Garden State relaxed its credit standards in early 1992 and improved its already favorable credit terms. As a result, sales growth did remain high by industry standards through the third quarter of 1992, but not high enough to keep inventories from continuing to rise. Further, the credit policy changes had caused accounts receivable to increase dramatically by late 1992.
To finance its rising inventories and receivables, Garden State turned to the bank for a long-term loan in 1991 and also increased its short-term credit lines in both 1991 and 1992. However, this expanded credit was insufficient to cover the asset expansion, so the company began to delay payments of its accounts payable until the second late notice had been received. Management realized that this was not a particularly wise decision for the long run, but they did not think it would be necessary to follow the policy for very long – the 1992 summer vegetable crop looked like a record breaker, and it was unlikely that a severe drought would pull out of the weak growth scenario in late 1992. Thus, the company was optimistic that its stable and profitable markets of the past would soon reappear.
After Martha’s telephone call, and the subsequent receipt of copy of the bank’s financial analysis of Garden State, Jim began to realize just how precarious his company’s financial position had become. As he started to reflect on what could be done to correct the problems, it suddenly to reflect on what could be done to correct the problems, it the bank imagined. Jim had recently signed a firm contract for a plant expansion that would require an additional $12,750,000 of capital during the first quarter of 1993, and he had planned to obtain this money with a short –term loan from the bank to be repaid from profits expected in the last half of 1993 as a result of the expansion. In his view, once the new production facility went on line, the company would be able to increase output in several segments of the shipping container market. It might have been possible to cut back on the expansion plans and to retrench, but because of the signed construction contracts and the cancellation charges that would be imposed if the plans were canceled, Jim correctly regards the $12,750,000 of new capital as being essential for Garden State’s very survival.
Jim quickly called his senior management team in for a meeting, explained the situation and asked for their help in formulating a solution. The group concluded that if the company’s current business plan were carried out, Garden State’s sales would grow by 10 percent from 1992 to 1993 and by another 15 percent from 1993 to 1994. Further, they concluded that Garden State should reverse its recent policy of aggressive pricing and easy credit, returning to pricing that fully covered costs plus normal profit margins and to standard industry credit practices. These changes should enable the company to reduce the cost of goods sold from over 85 percent of sales in 1992 to 8 percent in 1993 and then to 7.5 percent in 1994. Significant cuts should also be possible in miscellaneous expenses, which should fall from 2.92 percent of 1992 sales to approximately 1.75 percent of sales in 1993 and to 1.25 percent in 1994. These cost reductions represented “trimming the fat,” so they were not expected to degrade the quality of the firm’s products or the effectiveness of its sales efforts. Further, to appease suppliers, future bills would be paid more promptly, and to convince the bank how serious management is about correcting the company’s problems, cash dividends would be eliminated until the firm regains its financial health.
Assume that Jim has hired you as a consultant to first verify the bank’s evaluation of the company’s current financial situation and then put together a forecast of Garden State’s expected performance for 1993 and 1994. Jim asks you to develop some figures that ignore the possibility of a reduction in credit lines and that assume the bank will increase the line of credit by the $12,750,000 needed for the expansion and supporting working capital. Also, you and Jim do not expect the level of interest rates to change substantially over the two-year forecast period; however, you both think that the bank will charge 12 percent on both the additional short-term loan, if it is granted, and on the existing short-term loans, if they are extended. The assumed 40 percent combined federal and state tax rate should also hold for two years. Finally, if the bank cooperates, and if Jim is able to turn the company around, the P/E ratio should be 12 in 1993 and should rise to 14 in 1994.
Questions
1. Complete the 1992 columns of Tables 3 through 6, disregarding for now the projected data in the 1993 and 1994 columns. If you are using the Lotus model, use it to complete the tables. Be sure you understand all the numbers, as it would be most embarrassing if you were asked how you got a particular number, and could not give a meaningful response.
2. Based on the information in the case and on the results of your calculations in Question 1. prepare a list of Garden State’s strengths and weaknesses. In essence, you should look at the common-sized statements and each group of key ratios (for example, the liquidity ratios) and see what those ratios indicate about the company’s operations and financial condition. As part of your answer, use the extended Du Pont equation to highlight the key relationships.
3. Recognizing that you might want to revive your opinion later, does it appear, based on your analysis to this point, that the bank should lend the requested money to Garden State? Explain.

Table 3

Common-Sized Balance Sheets for Years Ended December 31
1990 1991 1992
Assets:
Cash and marketable securities 8.82% 5.13% 3.37%
Accounts receivable 30.39 25.72 x
Inventory 35.36 48.32 50.39
Current Assets 74.55% 79.18% x
Land, buildings, plant, and equipment 30.78% 27.31% x
Accumulated depreciation -5.32% -6.48% -6.88
Net fixed assets 25.45% 20.82% 16.05%
Total assets 100.00% 100.00% 100.00%

Table 4

Common-Size Income Statements for Years Ended December 31
1990 1991 1992

Net sales 100.00% 100.00% 100.00%
Cost of goods sold 80.52 82.18 x
Gross profit 19.48% 17.82% 14.76%
Admin & selling expenses 7.30% 8.11% 8.41%
Depreciation 0.91 0.88% x
Miscellaneaous expenses 1.16% 1.88% 2.85%
Total operating expenses 9.36% 10.86% 2.28%
EBIT 10.12% 6.95% 2.48%
Interest on short-term loans 0.18% 0.30% x
Interest on long term loans 0.38% 0.53% x
Interest on mortgage 0.15% 0.12% 0.10%
Total interest 0.71% 0.95% 1.51%
Before tax earnings 9.41% 6.00% 0.96%
Taxes 3.76% 2.40% x
Net income 5.64% 3.60% 0.58%

Dividends on stock 1.41% 0.90% 0.14%
Additions to retained earnings 4.23% 2.70% 0.43%

Table 5

Statement of Cash Flows for Years Ended December 31
1991 1992
Cash Flows from Operations
Sales $378,549 $401,251
Increase in receivables -2,728 x
Cash sales $375,821 $379,461
Cost of goods sold ($311,110) -342,016
Increase in inventories ($29,570) -28,623
Increase in accts payable $7,484 18,984
Increase in accruals $3,314 x
Cash cost of goods ($329,882) x
Cash margin $45,939 x
Admin & selling expenses ($30,690) ($33,762)
Miscellaneous expenses ($7,114) ($11,450)
Taxes ($9,088) ($1,547)
Net Cash Flow from operations ($953) x

Cash Flow from Fixed Asset Investment:
Investment in fixed assets ($4,561) ($5,409)

Cash Flow from Financing Activities:
Increase in short term debt $3,824 $26,266
Increase in long term debt 6,694 x
Repayment of mortgage ($536) ($522)
Interest expense ($3,598) ($6,076)
Common dividends ($3,408) ($580)

Net Cash Flow from financing activities $2,976 $19,088
Increase (decrease) in cash
and marketable securities ($2,539) x

Table 6

Historical and Pro Forma Ratio Analysis for Years Ended December 31
Pro Forma Industry
1990 1991 1992 1993 1994 Average
Liquidity Ratios:
Current ratio 3.13 2.74 x x x 2.5
Quick ratio 1.65 1.07 0.72 1.13 x 1.00

Leverage Ratios:
Debt ratio 40.80% 46.47% x x 52.31% 50.00%
TIE coverage 14.23 7.31 1.64 x 6.55 7.7

Asset Management Ratios:
Inventory turnover (cost)a 7.09 4.49 3.49 5.70 5.70 5.70
Inventory turnover (sale)b 8.81 5.46 4.10 x x 7.00
Fixed asset turnover 12.24 12.67 12.85 11.38 13.77 12.00
Total asset turnover 3.12 2.64 x 2.05 x 3.00
Days sale outstanding (ACP)c 35.12 35.11 52.68 x 32.00 32.00

Profitability Ratios:
Profit margin 5.64% 3.60% 0.58% x x 2.90%
Gross profit margin 19.48% 17.82% 14.76% 17.50% 20.00% 18.00%
Return on total assets 17.58% 9.50% x 5.90% 10.94% 8.80%
ROE 29.70% 17.74% 2.95% x x 17.50%

Other Ratios:
Altman Z scored 6.64 4.75 x 3.95 5.42 4.65
Payout ratio 25.00% 25.00% 25.00% 0.00% x 20.00%

Read More

Print Media Advertising (PMA) has been given a contract to market Buzz Cola via newspaper ads in a major southern newspaper. Full-page ads in the weekday editions (Monday through Saturday) cost $2000, whereas on Sunday a full-page ad costs $8000. Daily circulation of newspaper is 30,000 on weekdays and 80,000 on Sundays. PMA has been given a $40,000 advertising budget for the month of August. The experienced advertising executives at PMA feel that both weekday and Sunday newspaper ads are important; hence they wish to run the equivalent of at least eight weekday and at least two Sunday ads during August. (Assume that a fractional ad would simply mean that a smaller ad is placed on one of the days; that is, 3.5 ads would mean three full-page ads and one half-page ad. Also, assume that smaller ads reduce exposure and costs proportionately.) This August has 26 weekdays and 5 Sundays. The objective is to determine the optimal placement of ads by PMA in the newspaper during August so as to maximize the cumulative total exposure (as measured by circulation) for the month of August.

Print Media Advertising (PMA) has been given a contract to market Buzz Cola via newspaper ads in a major southern newspaper. Full-page ads in the weekday editions (Monday through Saturday) cost $2000, whereas on Sunday a full-page ad costs $8000. Daily circulation of newspaper is 30,000 on weekdays and 80,000 on Sundays. PMA has been given a $40,000 advertising budget for the month of August. The experienced advertising executives at PMA feel that both weekday and Sunday newspaper ads are important; hence they wish to run the equivalent of at least eight weekday and at least two Sunday ads during August. (Assume that a fractional ad would simply mean that a smaller ad is placed on one of the days; that is, 3.5 ads would mean three full-page ads and one half-page ad. Also, assume that smaller ads reduce exposure and costs proportionately.) This August has 26 weekdays and 5 Sundays. The objective is to determine the optimal placement of ads by PMA in the newspaper during August so as to maximize the cumulative total exposure (as measured by circulation) for the month of August.

Read More